JP2022019219A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can accurately and easily attach an outer rail while reducing the discomfort in a performance.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a game board (game board unit 8, game plate 8b, rail base 700) that forms a game area, and an outer rail 600 provided on the game board. In the outer rail 600, a plurality of predetermined guide portions 601 for guiding the mounting position to the game board are formed. In a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from a start end (PS) to a left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a first range (H1), the range from the left end (PL) to the upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a second range (H2), and the range from the upper end (PU) to a terminal end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a third range (H3), the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is larger in the first range (H1) (3, for example) than in the second range (H2) (2, for example), and larger in the second range (H2) than the third range (H3) (0, for example).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 88

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game.

Patent Document 1 describes a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, and when hitting to the left, a game ball is inserted into the starting port of the first special symbol to advance the game, but the passage in the left region is performed. It is described that when the game ball passes through the portion, the start opening of the second special symbol in the right region is opened.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-208334

In recent years, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can accurately and easily attach an outer rail while reducing a sense of discomfort in production.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately and easily attaching an outer rail while reducing a sense of discomfort in the production.

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above-mentioned problems. The wording in the following parentheses is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Further, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solutions can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can also be made into a higher conceptual by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

SOLUTION: The gaming machine of the present solving means fluctuates the first lottery execution means for executing the first lottery when the first lottery opportunity occurs, and the first symbol when the first lottery is executed. After that, the first symbol display means for stopping and displaying the first symbol in an manner corresponding to the result of the first lottery, and the second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity in a predetermined gaming state are described. Difficulty means that make it less likely to occur than the first lottery opportunity, the second lottery execution means that executes the second lottery when the second lottery opportunity occurs, and the second symbol when the second lottery is executed. The second symbol display means for stopping and displaying the second symbol in an manner corresponding to the result of the second lottery, and the specific effect based on the second lottery opportunity in the predetermined gaming state. The specific effect is provided with a specific effect executing means that can be executed, and the specific effect is not executed even if the second lottery trigger occurs in the predetermined gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is a gaming machine.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations.
(1) When the first lottery opportunity occurs (when a game ball enters the starting winning opening of the first special symbol), the first lottery (first special symbol lottery) is executed.
(2) When the first lottery of the above (1) is executed, the first symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the first lottery is performed in a manner corresponding to the result of the first lottery of the above (1). Stop and display the design.

(3) In a predetermined gaming state (for example, a non-time shortened state), a second lottery opportunity (a second special symbol lottery lottery opportunity) different from the first lottery opportunity (the first special symbol lottery lottery opportunity) is performed. It is equipped with a difficult means to make it less likely to occur than the first lottery opportunity.

(4) When the second lottery opportunity of the above (3) occurs (when a game ball enters the start winning opening of the second special symbol), the second lottery (second special symbol lottery) is executed.
(5) When the second lottery of (4) above is executed, the second symbol (second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the second lottery is performed in a manner corresponding to the result of the second lottery of (4) above. Stop and display the design.

(6) In the predetermined gaming state of (3) above, it is possible to execute a specific effect (search challenge icon display effect) based on the second lottery opportunity. The specific effect based on the second lottery opportunity may be an effect executed based on the occurrence of the second lottery opportunity in a predetermined game state, and in a game state (time shortened state) other than the predetermined game state. It may be an effect executed based on the occurrence of the second lottery opportunity.
(7) The specific effect of the above (6) is the predetermined of the above (3) when the predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, when the fluctuation due to the special fluctuation pattern is executed, when the predetermined lottery is won, etc.). Even if the second lottery opportunity of (3) above occurs in the game state of, it is not executed.

According to the present solution, in a predetermined gaming state, a specific effect based on the second lottery opportunity is basically executed, but in some cases, the specific effect is not executed, so that a sense of incongruity may occur when the specific effect is executed. It is possible not to execute a specific effect in such a scene, and it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort in the effect.

Solution 2: In any of the above-mentioned solutions, the gaming machine of the present solution selects a special variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern as the variation pattern of the second symbol under the predetermined condition. It is a gaming machine characterized by the condition.

In the present solution, the predetermined condition is a special fluctuation pattern (variation having a shorter fluctuation time than the predetermined fluctuation pattern) different from the predetermined fluctuation pattern (variation pattern having a long fluctuation time) as the fluctuation pattern of the second symbol. The condition is that the pattern) is selected.

According to the present solution, since the predetermined condition is that a special fluctuation pattern different from the predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the second symbol, a special fluctuation pattern is set. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the originally intended effect cannot be executed, and as a result, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort in the effect.

Solution 3: The gaming machine of the present solution makes it possible to select a variation pattern having a variation time in which the specific effect cannot be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in any of the above-mentioned solutions. It is a gaming machine characterized by being provided with pattern selection means.

In the present solution, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to select a fluctuation pattern (variation pattern corresponding to a short fluctuation) having a fluctuation time in which a specific effect cannot be executed. If the predetermined conditions are not satisfied, it is possible to select a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time in which a specific effect can be executed (a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a long fluctuation having a fluctuation time longer than a short fluctuation).

According to the present solution, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time in which a specific effect cannot be executed can be selected, so that the specific effect is executed in an unintended situation. , It can also be avoided by selecting a fluctuation pattern.

Solution F1: The gaming machine of the present solution means to display the first lottery execution means for executing the first lottery when the first lottery opportunity occurs, and the first symbol variablely displayed when the first lottery is executed. After that, the first symbol display means for stopping and displaying the first symbol in an manner corresponding to the result of the first lottery, and the second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity in a predetermined gaming state are described. Difficulty means that make it less likely to occur than the first lottery opportunity, the second lottery execution means that executes the second lottery when the second lottery opportunity occurs, and the second symbol when the second lottery is executed. The second symbol display means for stopping and displaying the second symbol in an manner corresponding to the result of the second lottery, and the specific effect based on the second lottery opportunity in the predetermined gaming state. The specific effect is provided with a specific effect executing means that can be executed, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific effect is not executed even if the second lottery trigger occurs in the predetermined game state, and the game area is changed. A game board to be formed and an outer rail provided on the game board are provided, and the outer rail is formed with a plurality of predetermined guide portions for guiding a mounting position to the game board, and the outer rail is formed. In the state provided on the game board, the range from the start end to the left end of the outer rail is set as the first range, the range from the left end to the upper end of the outer rail is set as the second range, and the range from the upper end of the outer rail is set. Assuming that the range up to the end is the third range, the number of the predetermined guide portions is larger in the first range than in the second range, and the second range is in the third range. It is a gaming machine characterized by having more than.

According to the present solution, a large number of predetermined guide portions are arranged on the ball launcher side where the impact received from the game ball is large and the arrangement of the outer rail is particularly required to be accurate, and the outer rail on the ball launcher side is arranged. It is possible to reliably prevent displacement and vibration.
Further, according to the present solution, a predetermined guide portion is arranged on the terminal side of the outer rail, which has a small impact from the game ball and has little influence on the game, and the outer rail is processed or attached to the rail base. Can be facilitated.
Further, according to the present solution, the outer rail can be attached accurately and easily while reducing the discomfort in the production.
In addition, the features of the above-mentioned solutions 2 and 3 can be added to the present solution.
Then, according to each of the above-mentioned solutions, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately and easily attaching an outer rail while reducing a sense of discomfort in the production.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a front view which shows the part of a game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an interrupt management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of the special symbol game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a figure which shows the constituent column of the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the constituent column of the 2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the variation pattern determination processing at the time of a break. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table by a symbol at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the procedure example of a large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of passing a specific area. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a solenoid management process. It is a timing chart which shows the movable pattern of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in a drive mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in a drive mode. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. (1/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. (2/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. (3/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. (4/4). It is a figure which shows the 1st effect example when the search challenge icon is not displayed (1/2). It is a figure which shows the 1st effect example when the search challenge icon is not displayed (2/2). It is a figure which shows the 2nd production example when the search challenge icon is not displayed (1/3). It is a figure which shows the 2nd production example when the search challenge icon is not displayed (2/3). It is a figure which shows the 2nd production example when the search challenge icon is not displayed (3/3). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role middle production performed during a big hit game (1/2). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role middle production performed during a big hit game (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (3/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example at the time of shifting from the drive mode in a non-time reduction state to the normal mode in a non-time reduction state (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example at the time of shifting from the drive mode in a non-time reduction state to the normal mode in a non-time reduction state (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example at the time of shifting from the drive mode in a non-time reduction state to the normal mode in a non-time reduction state (3/3). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the effect symbol stop display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of a variable winning apparatus operation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the time saving medium and the pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol winning processing. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of another embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine of another embodiment. It is a front view which shows the game board unit of another embodiment independently. FIG. 8 is a schematic view showing a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 81. It is a figure which shows the outer rail. It is a figure which shows the game board, the outer rail and the rail base. It is a figure which shows the state which a game ball comes into contact with an outer rail. It is a figure which shows the outer rail and the game board.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of balls. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

[Overall configuration of gaming machines]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side of the player when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 has fasteners such as screws for island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the upper and lower short sides, and metal is used for the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 1. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in a state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

Further, a cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the game hall inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above-mentioned game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the above-mentioned inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 toward the front surface as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the saucer unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to the CR unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It is paid out to the plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) worth of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium charged in the CR unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is given as an example of a model connected to the CR unit, but may be a model not connected to the CR unit.

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can, for example, push the upper plate ball removal button 6d to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the grip unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower side of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right lighting unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (without reference numeral). The glass frame decorative lamp 52 includes a button lamp built in the push button 45a.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, light emission (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.) of the built-in LED. Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, the outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, and the like (general sound) to execute the effect.

[Operating member]
Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an operation unit 45 is installed so as to project upward from the upper plate 6b on the front surface side (operation member). A circular push button 45a is arranged in the center of the operation unit 45, and a rod-shaped lever member 45b is arranged on the left side of the push button 45a. The operation unit 45 can accept operations in various situations shown in the production. In one scene of the production, the push button 45a is pressed by the player, and in another scene, the lever member 45b is pulled toward the front side by the player. By operating the operation unit 45 in various modes, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbol is changing, the jackpot is confirmed, or the jackpot is hit. It is possible to generate some kind of effect (notice effect, probable change promotion effect, promotion effect during a major role, etc.) during the game.

Further, around the push button 45a, a ring-shaped portion 45c is installed so as to surround the push button 45a. Unlike the push button 45a and the lever member 45b, the ring-shaped portion 45c is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pulling operation of the lever member 45b. Further, the ring-shaped portion 45c has a plurality of cells separated in the circumferential direction at regular intervals. Although these cells cannot accept operations by the player, they are effectively used in situations where the player is informed of the operation method.

When requesting some operation from the player, a reduced version image showing the operation method of the operation unit 45 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. At this time, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (operation effective time), the ring-shaped portion 45c in the reduced image is expressed as if each cell is a lamp. To. More specifically, in the ring-shaped portion in the reduced image, all the cells are turned on and displayed when the operation is possible, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. Then, when the remaining time is exhausted, all the cells are turned off. The actual ring-shaped portion 45c does not have a light source and does not turn on / off like the ring-shaped portion shown in the reduced version image displayed on the liquid crystal screen, but the ring-shaped portion in the reduced version image is not turned on / off. By switching the lighting / extinguishing of the unit in this way, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation.

Further, the push button 45a can be projected upward when a predetermined opportunity occurs in the progress of the game. The push button 45a has a button lamp (light source) inside thereof. Normally, the push button 45a emits light in a default color (for example, white or blue), but if the expectation of winning is high, it may emit light in a color different from the default color (yellow or red), and it protrudes. Sometimes it can emit more colorful light. By projecting the push button 45a, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pressing operation of the button at the time of projecting is particularly important.

In the present embodiment, the push button 45a and the lever member 45b are mounted on the same operation unit 45, but the push button 45a and the lever member 45b may be provided as independent operation members. Further, these operating members may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.

Further, a cross key button 44 is installed on the right side of the operation unit 45. The cross-shaped key button 44 is composed of, for example, four push-type buttons. Specifically, the cross key button 44 is an upper button arranged on the gaming machine side, a right button arranged on the right side, a lower button arranged on the player side, and a left arranged on the left side when viewed from the player. It consists of buttons. By pushing the cross key button 44, the player can set the game environment and input the player's personal data into the game machine. Further, the player can switch the auto button function ON and OFF by pressing the upper button of the cross key button 44.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), external terminal boards 160, power cord (power plug) 164, which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, are used. A ground wire (earth terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed. The electronic devices will be described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 14).

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without reference numeral), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, the game balls replenished from the replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game ball stored in the prize ball tank 172a is guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the above-mentioned external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal board 160, a game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island facility of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Structure of board]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is a left side portion (first area, left-handed area) and a right side portion (centering on the effect unit 40). The second area, right-handed area) and the lower part are largely divided. Further, in the game area 8a, a start device 400, a start gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, etc. are placed around the effect unit 40. Are distributed and installed. Of these, the start device 400 is located in the lower center of the left side portion of the game area 8a. The details of the start device 400 will be described later. Further, on the right side portion of the game area 8a, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of its flow, enters the start device 400, enters the normal winning openings 22 and 25 (wins), or , The variable start winning device 28 at the time of opening operation, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter the start device 400 or the normal winning opening 22. The game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20, enters the normal winning opening 25, enters the variable start winning device 28 during the opening operation, or enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation. There is a possibility that the ball may enter the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation.

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a hit manner), and accordingly, the right starting winning opening 28b is entered. Enables a ball (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members 28a, and these opening / closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 3, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the right starting winning opening 28b (the game ball enters the ball). There is no gap that can be created). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is activated, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width is expanded to the left and right to open the right start winning opening 28b. During this period, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the game ball can be entered, and the right starting winning opening 28b can be generated (variable starting winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28a also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the right starting winning opening 28b. Further, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not always enter the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b) at the time of opening operation, and the winning ball occurs randomly.

Further, the variable start winning device 28 is a predetermined condition that is difficult to be satisfied in the non-time shortened state (predetermined gaming state), and is more likely to be satisfied in the time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) than in the non-time shortened state. If the operating condition (the condition that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode and the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time) is not satisfied, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b. On the other hand, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the state shifts to an easy-to-enter state in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the right-starting winning opening 28b than in the difficult-to-enter state. The variable start winning device 28 short-opens (opens for 0.1 seconds) when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode in the non-time shortened state, and stops and displays the normal symbol in the winning mode in the time shortened state. If it is done, it will be opened for a long time (open for 1.0 to 6.0 seconds).

The first variable winning device 30 operates when the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, or when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game). , The first special winning opening 30b can be entered (special electric accessory, first special winning event generating means).

The first variable winning device 30 (attacker) is a device arranged in the lower part of the variable starting winning device 28, and has one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example, to open / close the opening / closing member 30a. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b. When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall forward with its lower end edge portion as a hinge, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the game ball can flow in, and the event of winning a prize in the first large winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30b.

The second variable winning device 31 operates when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit), and enables the ball to enter the second large winning opening 31b (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed). Special electric accessory, second special prize event generation means). The second variable winning device 31 may be operated when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged on the right side of the effect unit 40, and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 employs a type of device in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a, so that the opening / closing member 31a is moved to the second large winning opening 31b. It is difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not difficult, and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

[Specific area]
Further, a specific area 31x is provided inside the second variable winning device 31. The specific area 31x is an area in which the game ball is difficult to pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the specific area slide member 31c is in the open state when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. This is the area where the game ball can pass when it is pulled into the inside of the board. The details of the second variable winning device 31 will be described later.

Further, although not particularly shown, the second variable winning device 31 (opening / closing member 31a) may be formed with a game ball rolling speed reducing portion that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball. The game ball rolling speed reduction portion makes the inclination of the opening / closing member 31a gentle, or forms alternating protrusions for advancing the game ball in a zigzag position at a position on the opening / closing member 31a through which the game ball passes. It can be realized. As a result, many game balls can be entered into the second variable winning device 31 during the small hit game.

In addition, an out opening 32 is formed inside the start device 400, and the game balls that have not won in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, each start winning opening of the start device 400, normal winning opening 22, 25, variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b), first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b), second variable winning opening. All the game balls driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that have entered the device 31 (second large winning opening 31b, specific area), are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the supply route of the island facility (not shown).

4 and 5 are views showing the details of the second variable winning device 31.
In the second variable winning device 31, the second large winning opening 31b is arranged below the slide-type opening / closing member 31a. The inside of the second prize opening 31b has a downward slope to the left, and a passage extends downward at the left end. A second count switch 85 is arranged in the passage extending downward, and the second count switch 85 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31.

Then, the passage extending downward is divided into two routes beyond that. One first passage 31d extends downward toward the specific region 31x, and the other second passage 31e extends downward toward the discharge hole 31y.
A slide member 31c for a specific area is arranged in the first passage 31d, and a specific area 31x is arranged downstream of the first passage 31d. A specific area switch (not shown) is arranged inside the specific area 31x.
On the other hand, no special member is arranged in the second passage 31e, and the discharge hole 31y is arranged downstream of the second passage 31e.

The slide member 31c for a specific area operates when a special condition is satisfied (after the lapse of the first time and before the lapse of the second time after the operation of the second variable winning device 31), and the slide member 31c for the specific area is moved to the specific area 31x. Allows the passage of game balls. The slide member 31c for a specific region slides along the front-rear direction of the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a specific region solenoid (not shown). For example, after the lapse of the first time, 0.2 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated, and after the lapse of the second time, 1.8 seconds after the second variable winning device 31 was activated. After the lapse of time.

When the specific region solenoid is in the OFF state, the slide member 31c for the specific region blocks the first passage 31d, so that it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific region 31x. On the other hand, when the specific region solenoid is turned on, the slide member 31c for the specific region is pulled inside the board surface, so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific region 31x.

Next, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 4A, the slide-type opening / closing member 31a is pulled inside the board surface, and the game ball enters the second large winning opening 31b. In the illustrated example, four game balls are advancing toward the second prize opening 31b. Here, the first game ball is detected by the second count switch 85.

As shown in FIG. 4B, the first game ball has reached the slide member 31c for a specific area. The second and third game balls are advancing toward the second count switch 85. The fourth game ball is about to enter the second big winning opening 31b.

As shown in FIG. 4 (C), at this time, the slide member 31c for a specific area is not pulled inward (because it is not operating), so that the first game ball is a slide for a specific area. The traveling direction is changed to the right side by the member 31c and heads toward the second passage 31e. In this case, the first game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

As shown in FIG. 5 (D), it is assumed that the slide member 31c for a specific region is pulled inside the board surface at this point (during operation). In this case, the second game ball passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for a specific area and proceeds to the first passage 31d. Then, the second game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 5 (E), the third game ball also passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific region and proceeds to the first passage 31d. In this case, the third game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 5 (F), it is assumed that the operation of the slide member 31c for the specific area is completed at this point, and the slide member 31c for the specific area protrudes to the front side of the board surface. In this case, the fourth game ball is guided to the right by the slide member 31c for a specific area and advances to the second passage 31e. Then, the fourth game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

6 to 12 are views showing the details of the start device 400.
FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the start device 400.
As shown in FIG. 6, the start device 400 includes a base member 410, a cover member 420, a ball entry port 430, a right movable device 480, a left movable device 490, and the like.

The base member 410 is a member that serves as a base for the start device 400, and is attached to the game board unit 8 by a fastening member such as a screw.
The cover member 420 is a member attached to the front surface side of the base member 410, and various start winning openings and out openings are arranged inside the cover member 420.

The ball entry port 430 is arranged in the center of the upper part of the cover member 420, and is an entrance for the game ball to enter the start device 400.

The right movable device 480 is attached to the rear right side of the base member 410, and is a device for moving the right blade member 438 (see FIG. 7) of the start device 400.

The left movable device 490 is attached to the rear left side of the base member 410, and is a device for moving the left blade member 442 (see FIG. 7) of the start device 400.

7 and 8 are views showing the internal structure of the start device 400.
Here, FIG. 7 shows a state in which the blade members of the start device 400 (right blade member 438 and left blade member 442) are closed, and FIG. 8 shows a state in which the blade members of the start device 400 are open. It shows the state.

As shown in FIG. 7, a guide passage 432 inclined in the lower right direction is formed below the entrance 430.
At the lower right of the guide passage 432, a one-hole croon member 434 is arranged. The crune member 434 is a mortar-shaped member having a large opening on the upper side, and an opening through which one game ball can pass is formed on the bottom surface.
Below the crune member 434, a guide passage 436 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.

A right blade member 438 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 436.
At the lower left of the right blade member 438, a guide passage 440 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.
A left blade member 442 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 440.
At the lower left of the left blade member 442, a guide passage 444 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.

The right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are movable bodies that can be moved.
Further, the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are arranged above (upstream) the start device right start winning opening 450 and the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the game ball is placed on the start device right starting winning opening 450 or the start device. It is a member that affects whether or not the ball enters (whether or not it passes) in the middle start winning opening 452.

When the solenoid that operates the right blade member 438 is turned on, the right blade member 438 rises upward and shifts to the open state, and guides the game ball to the start device right start winning opening 450. On the other hand, when the solenoid that operates the right blade member 438 is turned off, the right blade member 438 maintains a closed state without getting up, and the game ball passes through the upper part of the right blade member 438 and enters the guide passage 440. Be guided.

Further, when the solenoid for operating the left blade member 442 is turned on, the left blade member 442 rises upward and shifts to the open state, and guides the game ball to the start winning opening 452 in the start device. On the other hand, when the solenoid that operates the left blade member 442 is turned off, the left blade member 442 maintains a closed state without getting up, and the game ball passes through the upper part of the left blade member 442 and enters the guide passage 444. Be guided.

In the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442, when the movable pin inserted near the center of the member is pushed upward, the movable pin moves along the guide groove arranged rearward, and the left side rotates. It rotates about the axis and shifts to the open state (see FIG. 8).

Below the right blade member 438, a start device right start winning opening 450 is arranged. The right start winning opening 450 of the start device is an opportunity generation area in which a game ball that has entered the entry opening 430 can enter (pass) and can generate a lottery opportunity (predetermined opportunity) for the first special symbol lottery. Is.

Below the left blade member 442, a start winning opening 452 in the start device is arranged. The start winning opening 452 in the start device is an opportunity generation area in which a game ball that has entered the entry opening 430 can enter (pass) and can generate a lottery opportunity (predetermined opportunity) for the first special symbol lottery. Is.

At the lower left of the guide passage 444, a start device left start winning opening 454 is arranged. The start device left start winning opening 454 is an opportunity generation area in which a game ball that has entered the entry opening 430 can enter (pass) and can generate a lottery opportunity (predetermined opportunity) for a normal symbol lottery. ..

On the right side of the start device right start winning opening 450, a guide passage 462 inclined in the lower right direction is formed.
An out port 32 is arranged at the lower right of the guide passage 462. On the right side of the out port 32, a guide passage 460 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.

On the left side of the start device right start winning opening 450, a guide passage 464 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.
An out port 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 464.

A guide passage 466 inclined in the lower right direction is formed on the right side of the start winning opening 452 in the start device.
On the left side of the start winning opening 452 in the start device, a guide passage 468 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.
An out port 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 468.

On the right side of the start device left start winning opening 454, a guide passage 470 inclined in the lower right direction is formed.
On the left side of the start device left start winning opening 454, a guide passage 472 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.
An out port 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 472. On the left side of the out port 32, a guide passage 474 inclined in the lower right direction is formed.

Below the start device right start winning opening 450, the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the start device left starting winning opening 454, the start device illumination board 476 is arranged.
Three lamps (LEDs) 478 are arranged on the start device illuminated board 476, and when a game ball enters each start winning opening, the corresponding lamp is turned on.

Next, the flow of the game ball inside the start device 400 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 9, the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 430 is guided to the right blade member 438 via the crune member 434.
Then, when the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are closed, the game ball passes over the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442, and finally, the start device left start winning opening 454. Enter the ball.

Since the start device left start winning opening switch is arranged in the start device left starting winning opening 454, the entry of the game ball is detected by the start device left starting winning opening switch.

On the other hand, even when the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is open, the flow of the game ball is the same as when the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is closed until the middle.
That is, as shown in FIG. 10, the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 430 is guided to the right blade member 438 via the croon member 434.

Then, when the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is open, the game ball falls at the position of the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442, and finally, the start device right start winning opening 450. Alternatively, the ball is entered into the start winning opening 452 in the start device.

Since the start device right start winning opening switch is arranged in the start device right starting winning opening 450, the entry of the game ball is detected by the start device right starting winning opening switch.
Further, since the start winning opening switch in the start device is arranged in the starting winning opening 452 in the start device, the entry of the game ball is detected by the start winning opening switch in the start device.

Here, when the game ball enters the entry slot 430 of the start device 400, the ball must enter any one of the start device right start winning opening 450, the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the start device left start winning opening 454. In some cases, the ball may enter the out opening 32. Further, not only the game ball that has entered the entry port 430 of the start device 400 but also the game ball that has not entered the entry port 430 of the start device 400 enters the out port 32 from the side surface side. There is also.
Although the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are described in the example of simultaneously shifting to the open state, it is also possible not to shift to the open state at the same time.

11 and 12 are side views of the start device 400.
Here, FIG. 11 shows a state in which the blade member (for example, the right blade member 438 in FIG. 10) is closed, and FIG. 12 shows a state in which the blade member is open.

As described above, the right movable device 480 is attached to the rear right side of the base member 410 and is a device for moving the right blade member 438 of the start device 400.

Further, the right movable device 480 includes a start device right solenoid 481, a coil member 482, a flapper member 483, an arm member 484, a hook member 485, a spring member 486, and the like. The hook member 485 may be configured as a part of the arm member 484 (the hook member 485 and the arm member 484 may be the same component).

When the start device right solenoid 481 is energized by the main control device, the coil member 482 is excited and the plate-shaped flapper member 483 is attracted to the coil member 482.
The flapper member 483 and the arm member 484 are connected to each other, and when the flapper member 483 moves upward, the arm member 484 also moves upward. Further, an arc-shaped hook member 485 is connected to the tip of the arm member 484. Therefore, as the flapper member 483 and the arm member 484 move, the hook member 485 also moves upward (see FIG. 12).

Then, when the hook member 485 moves upward, the hook member 485 pushes up the movable pin 487 inserted in the right blade member 438, and the right blade member 438 shifts from the closed state to the open state (see FIG. 10). In this case, the coil member 482 and the flapper member 483 are prevented from coming into contact with each other by a stopper (not shown) (see FIG. 12).

Further, when the right solenoid 481 of the start device is not energized, the flapper member 483 is arranged at a position away from the coil member 482 by the spring member 486 (or the weight of the spring member 486 and the flapper member 483). (See FIG. 11).
Although the right movable device 480 has been described here, the same configuration is adopted for the left movable device 490.

[Characteristics of start device]
There are many prize-winning device units that are provided with an opening / closing member to limit winning in a specific winning area as a conventional technique, but as in the present embodiment, the starting winning opening is provided. There is no configuration in which the opening / closing member keeps opening / closing operation from the time the power is turned on, and the opening / closing of the opening / closing member stabilizes the start winning rate.

The start device 400 randomly changes various symbols by distributing the game ball that has entered the entry opening 430 into the start winning opening of the special symbol and the start winning opening (winning opening, operating opening) of the normal symbol. It has the function of "making it".

Hereinafter, the details of the flow of the game ball in the start device 400 will be described.
(1) An entry port 430 is held at the top of the start device 400, and the game ball that enters from there heads toward the crune member 434 in one hole, and the time until it is discharged from the crune member 434 is an irregular time. give. As a result, it is possible to avoid the goto against vibration such as rushing. It is also possible to attach a vibration sensor, a magnet sensor, and a radio wave sensor to the start device 400 to strengthen measures against various problems. The crune member 434 is attached to the start device 400 with some play, and can absorb an external impact (such as a rush) by the play, so that the influence of vibration can be avoided.

(2) The game ball discharged from the crune member 434 is guided to a slope-shaped guide passage, and depending on the open / closed state of the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 arranged in the middle of the guide passage and constantly opening and closing. The sphere path changes as follows.

(A) When the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is open, the game ball falls from the slope and heads toward the start winning opening of the special symbol held below.
(B) When the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is closed, the game ball passes over the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442. By mounting two blade members on the start device 400, the start winning opening of the special symbol is given two chances to win a prize.

(3) The game ball not picked up by the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 finally heads for the starting winning opening of the normal symbol (the normal symbol operating opening in which the normal symbol fluctuates).

Further, the start device 400 has the following features.
Out ports are arranged on the left and right of the start winning opening of the special symbol and the starting winning opening of the normal symbol, and the out opening at the bottom of the board in a general model is deleted.
Since the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are constantly movable, the actuator of the start device 400 is equipped with a flapper type solenoid instead of the generally used push-pull type solenoid to prevent deterioration due to wear. I'm preventing it.

In addition, since the player has to visually follow how the game balls that have entered the start device 400 are distributed, a special symbol start winning opening is used to visually inform the player of this. In addition, a lamp (LED) is placed at the bottom of the starting winning opening of the normal symbol to have a function to illuminate at the winning timing.

Then, by adopting the start device 400 having such a configuration, the following effects can be exhibited.
(1) By mounting the crune member 434, the timing of the game ball entering the start device 400 toward the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 that opens and closes is given irregularity to the player. It is possible to increase the feeling of exhilaration by the movement of the game ball, and to launch the game ball at the timing of opening the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442, which is a countermeasure against so-called capture hitting.

(2) By mounting the out port on the start device 400, the area of the out port arranged at the lower part of the board surface can be applied to the start device 400, and the start device 400 and the out port can be integrated to make the start device 400 compact. It is possible to make effective use of the lower part of the board.

(3) By adopting a flapper type solenoid, it is possible to prevent wear of the solenoid itself and ensure durability that can withstand constant movement.

(4) By arranging a lamp (LED) at the lower part of the start winning opening of the special symbol and the starting winning opening of the normal symbol and illuminating at the winning timing, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the prize has been won.

FIG. 13 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a).
The game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 (ordinary symbol display means) and a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a at a lower right position in the window 4a, and a first special symbol display device 34 (first special symbol display device 34). 1 symbol display means), a second special symbol display device 35 (second symbol display means), a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights three lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbols in a variable manner, and turns on or off the lamps to stop and display the ordinary symbols. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both the two lamps are turned off, 0 storage numbers are displayed, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, one storage number is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is blinked and another lamp is lit, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. Display the individual, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, a normal symbol working memory lamp 33a may be configured by using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

When the game ball passes through the start gate 20 or when the game ball enters the left start winning opening 454 of the start device, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a causes a passage that triggers an operation lottery each time. In the sense of remembering that, it changes to the display mode after increasing one by one (up to 4), and the display mode after decreasing by one each time the change of the normal symbol starts with the passage as a trigger. It changes to. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of storages is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the normal symbol has not yet started to change at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display, for example, a change state and a stop state of the special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means, first). Symbol display means, second symbol display means). In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a each have 0 to 4 lamps (LEDs), for example, 0 to 4 depending on the display mode composed of a combination of turning off, lighting, and blinking of the two lamps (LEDs). Displays the number of stored memory (means for displaying the number of stored memory). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, 0 storage numbers are displayed, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, one storage number is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp blinks. In the display mode in which two storage numbers are displayed and one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, three storage numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinking together, the storage number is displayed. It displays 4 pieces, and so on.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is increased by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the start device right start winning opening 450 or the start device middle starting winning opening 452, it is memorized that the entry has occurred. It changes to the later display mode (up to 4), and changes to the display mode after decreasing by 1 each time the change of the special symbol is started triggered by the entry of the ball. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is one by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b), the occurrence of a winning ball is memorized. It changes to the display mode after the increase (up to 4), and changes to the display mode after the decrease by 1 each time the change of the special symbol is started triggered by the entry of the ball. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of storages is 0), the first special symbol (first symbol) is already in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed). Even if a game ball enters the start device right start winning opening 450 or the start device middle starting winning opening 452, the display mode does not change. Further, when the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is not lit (the number of storages is 0), the variable start winning device is in a state where the second special symbol (second symbol) can already start variable (when the stop is displayed). Even if the game ball enters the 28 (right starting winning opening 28b), the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (maximum of 4) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation storage lamps 34a and 35a is that of the incoming ball for which the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not started yet at that time. It represents the number of times.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, six LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation display lamp 38f, respectively. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation storage lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Other configurations of the game board: see Fig. 3]
The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed in the upper part of the inside of the effect unit 40, and the liquid crystal display 42 is provided with an effect symbol (this symbol) corresponding to a special symbol and a fourth symbol. First, various production images are displayed. As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface (design of the cell board (not shown) and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d is connected to the lower rolling stage 40e through the back side of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k flows into the ball entry port 430 of the start device 400 directly below the ball release path 40k. It will be easier to do.

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) (not shown) is attached to the inside of the upper center of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f (for example, a heart-shaped decoration) for effect. The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By such an effect using the movable body 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image.

Further, a 7-segment display device 200 is arranged below the liquid crystal display 42. Three 7-segment LEDs are arranged on the 7-segment display device 200. The 7-segment display device 200 changes and displays the 7-segment effect symbol during the change of the special symbol, and displays the effect during the big hit game.

Further, a storage display device 300 is arranged at the lower right of the 7-segment display device 200. The storage display device 300 can execute an effect related to storage by emitting light (lighting, turning off, etc.) of the built-in LED.

The storage display device 300 is provided with a first special symbol storage display area M1, a second special symbol storage display area M2, the storage display area X1, and an effect display area X2.
Four white LEDs are arranged in the first special symbol storage display area M1, and the number of LEDs lit corresponds to the number of storages of the first special symbol (the number of displays of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a). There is.
Four white LEDs are arranged in the second special symbol storage display area M2, and the number of LEDs lit corresponds to the number of storages of the second special symbol (the number of displays of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a). There is.

One full-color LED is arranged in the storage display area X1, and the LED is lit, indicating that the special symbol is changing.
One or a plurality of full-color LEDs are arranged in the effect display area X2, and it is shown that the degree of expectation of winning the special symbol lottery is increased depending on the lighting color of the LEDs. Since the effect display area X2 is lit in the same color as the LED color (reserved color) internally drawn, it is possible to give an easy-to-understand notification to the player.

When the color change effect of the memory is executed, the lighting color of the target LED is normally changed, but in the present embodiment, the first special symbol storage display area M1 and the second special symbol storage display area M2 are white. The LED is arranged. Therefore, the color change effect cannot be executed in the first special symbol storage display area M1 and the second special symbol storage display area M2. Therefore, when the color change effect of the memory is executed, the lighting color of the effect display area X2 is changed to substitute for the color change effect. However, in this case, since it is difficult to know which memory is the target, it is preferable to blink the target LED.
A full-color LED may be arranged in the first special symbol storage display area M1 and the second special symbol storage display area M2 to execute the color change effect.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI that integrates semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Of these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for a big hit determination of a special symbol lottery or a hit determination of a normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main control device 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a counter / timer circuit (CTC), which are circuits together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. Further, the start device left start winning opening 454 is provided with a start device left starting winning opening switch 78a for detecting the entry of a game ball.
Further, the game board unit 8 starts corresponding to the start device middle start winning opening 452, the start device right start winning opening 450, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. The device is equipped with a start winning opening switch 80, a starting device right starting winning opening switch 81, a right starting winning opening switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85.
The start device middle start winning opening switch 80, the start device right start winning opening switch 81, and the right start winning opening switch 82 are the start device middle start winning opening 452, the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the variable start winning device 28 (right), respectively. This is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 28b). Further, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first variable winning device 30 (the first large winning opening 30b) and counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second variable winning device 31 (the second major winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof.

In addition, a specific area switch 83 is provided corresponding to the specific area 31x. A specific area switch 83 is provided at a position corresponding to the specific area 31x inside the second large winning opening 31b, and the specific area switch 83 detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the ordinary winning openings 22 and 25. Here, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used for all the ordinary winning opening 22 and 25 is given as an example. For example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the winning opening on the left side is installed. The switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the normal winning openings 22 and 25 located on the left side of the board, and the right winning opening switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the ordinary winning opening 25 located on the right side of the board. May be.

In any case, the winning detection signal and the passing detection signal of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the gate switch 78, the start device left start winning opening switch 78a, the specific area switch 83, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the winning opening switch 86 are used. The winning detection signal and the passing detection signal are transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, a connection terminal, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal. ..

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and are integrated. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 by relaying the panel relay terminal plate 87.

Further, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, and a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a first large winning opening solenoid corresponding to the specific area 31x, respectively. 90, the second prize opening solenoid 97 and the specific area solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and are the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x, respectively. To open and close. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and a control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, the glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and the plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, the contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal.

The payout control device 92 is equipped on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (means for granting special benefits). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and causes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls to be executed. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and the payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the above-mentioned saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. Each time the prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the above-mentioned flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with the game balls, the more paid out game balls are released. As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent out to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in one minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A firing relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the firing lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the firing stop switch 116 is transmitted to the firing control board 108 via the firing relay terminal plate 118. Will be sent to. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. do. In addition to this, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118, and when the above CR unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120, the same firing is performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 has a built-in frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with a display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the CR unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not loaded in the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the loaded valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display urging the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which the effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 has a built-in semiconductor memory such as ROM 128 and RAM 130 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position covered by the back cover unit 178.

Further, the effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect based on the command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72, gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134, and emits various lamps 46 to 52 and the board lamp 53. It is processed to actually output sound effects, voices, and the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). The serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of.

The lamp drive circuit 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and the lamp drive circuit 132 switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps including LEDs. ), And manage the operation such as light emission and blinking. In addition to the above-mentioned glass frame top lamp 46 and glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a board surface lamp 53 for decoration and production installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 corresponds to the LED built in the above-mentioned effect unit, the LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Although the example in which the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame illumination substrate 136 is given here, the saucer illumination substrate is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the glass frame decoration lamp 52 is attached to the saucer illumination. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp drive circuit 132 via a substrate.

Further, the acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator having a built-in sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown), and the acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the speakers 54, 55 on the glass frame and the outer frame speaker 56. To output sound.

In the present embodiment, the glass frame illuminated board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame illuminated board 136 to various lamps 46. It is applied to ~ 52 and the speakers 54, 55, 56. Further, the push button 45a and the lever member 45b are connected to the glass frame illuminated substrate 136, and when the player operates the push button 45a or the lever member 45b, the contact signal thereof is the glass frame illuminated substrate 136. It is input to the effect control device 124 through. Furthermore, the cross-shaped key button 44 is connected to the glass frame illuminated board 136, and when the player operates the cross-shaped key button 44, the contact signal is transmitted through the glass frame illuminated board 136 to the effect control device 124. Is entered in. Here, an example in which the push button 45a, the lever member 45b, and the cross key button 44 are connected to the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 is given, but when the above-mentioned saucer illuminated substrate is installed, the push button 45a and the lever member are given. The 45b and the cross key button 44 may be connected to the saucer illuminated board. In addition, a panel illuminated board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the panel illuminated board 138 in addition to the board lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57, respectively, via the panel illuminated circuit board 138. The movable body motor 57 may be a solenoid.

Further, a button motor 45d is connected to the glass frame illuminated substrate 136.
The button motor 45d is a stepping motor that raises and lowers the push button 45a, and is driven by an operation unit control device (not shown) that controls the operation unit 45. The operation unit control device drives the button motor 45d based on the drive signal transmitted from the effect control device 124, so that the push button 45a is in a normal state (initial position) or a protruding state (maximum movable position). It can be displaced.

Further, a 7-segment display device 200 and a storage display device 300 are connected to the effect control device 124. The 7-segment display device 200 and the storage display device 300 are driven by a control device (driver, IC) (not shown) that controls these devices. The effect control device 124 (effect control CPU 126) controls the 7-segment display device 200 and the storage display device 300 through a control device (not shown).

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a display processor VDP152 is mounted, together with a display control CPU 146 which is a general-purpose central processing unit. Of these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 148 and RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). Further, the VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 are integrated together with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program for controlling the effect, and the effect control CPU 126 executes the control of the effect according to this program. The control of the effect includes the control of the effect using various lamps 46 to 53 and the speakers 54, 55, 56 as described above, and the control of the effect by displaying the image using the liquid crystal display 42. .. The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information about the effect (for example, an effect number) to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives this transmits a concrete image for effect based on the basic information. Control the display.

The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Upon receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads out necessary image data from the image ROM 154, and transfers the necessary image data to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 into a frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time), and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is individually based on the image data buffered here. Driven to.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The above-mentioned external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to the outside from. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160.

The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or by clearing the backup information. It is a process for. Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

15 and 16 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector method interrupt mode (mode 2), and corrects the default RST method interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the designated interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 now executes a reset standby process. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checking the main power cutoff detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power supply cutoff detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power supply cutoff detection signal is input from, for example, a power supply monitoring IC which is a peripheral device. Then, if the input of the main power supply cutoff detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. This makes it possible to protect the system when, for example, the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S105: Further, the main control CPU 72 and the mask register are initially set in order to set the interrupt mask. Specifically, the value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch saved earlier, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), then step S107 is executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power cutoff process and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all the work areas (user work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the thumb check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Further, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurs.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a return command (for example, a model specification command, a special symbol probability state specification command, an operation memory number increase effect command, an operation memory number decrease effect command, and a number of times cut) to the effect control device 124. Counter commands, special game status specification commands, etc.) are sent. In response to this, the effect control device 124 determines the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the acoustic output content, and various lamps) that were being executed when the power was cut off last time. (Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes the state return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state (for example, the display mode of the special symbol, the internal probability state, etc.) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the value of the backed up PC register.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs the initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command required for the effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of the prize ball to the payout control device 92.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes the CTC initial setting process and performs the initial setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector register, and also sets the interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the program address of the backed up PC register.

When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 16 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes a power failure occurrence check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power cutoff detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power cutoff (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the grand prize opening solenoid 90, etc., and then the entire work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup validity judgment flag and the thumb check buffer. Back up the contents of and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup valid determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops the process (NOP). On the other hand, if the power cutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU is made to execute such a process when a power failure occurs as an unmaskable interrupt (NMI) process.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) excluding jackpot determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) and hit determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols). Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 18), but the initial value of the loop counter (all) is updated every time the random number value makes one cycle in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S120 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 18), so that it overlaps with this (conflict). ) To prevent. As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is even faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit decision random number and the hit decision random number.

Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed with the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 18). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of the procedure for the power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set, for example, as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is continuously output.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power supply cutoff detection switch input port, and confirms whether or not the main power supply cutoff detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, the main power supply cutoff detection switch is mounted on, for example, the main control device 70, and the main power supply cutoff detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162, and its voltage level is set. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, a main power cutoff detection signal is output. The main power supply cutoff detection switch may be built in the power supply control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power supply cutoff detection signal has not been output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-counter value set in the previous step S130 is subtracted by, for example, 1, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not 0 at this point (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power cutoff detection switch input port. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the test signal terminal and the output port buffer corresponding to the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the grand prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the thumb check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores "01H" indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop and stops all other processing in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (not shown), so that the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power supply is cut off. Retained without doing. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the main power supply is turned off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 15).

[Interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)]
Next, the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the interrupt management process. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L pairs) used during the execution of the main loop to the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described above.

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes the input process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the start device left start winning opening switch 78a, the start device middle start winning opening switch 80, the start device right starting winning opening switch 81, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first 1 Reads the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from the count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86, and the specific area switch 83.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the gate switch 78, the start device left start winning opening switch 78a, the start device middle start winning opening switch 80, the start device right starting winning opening switch 81, and the right starting winning opening. The event that occurred during the game is determined based on the passage detection signals from the mouth switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the specific area switch 83, and another event is determined according to each event. Execute the process. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using yet another flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the start device middle start winning port switch 80 or the start device right starting winning port switch 81, the main control CPU 72 draws an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery trigger, first lottery trigger, first special symbol lottery lottery trigger) has occurred.
Further, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the right start winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 triggers an internal lottery corresponding to the second special symbol (lottery trigger, second lottery trigger, second special symbol). It is determined that an event that triggers the lottery has occurred.
Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, or when the prize detection signal (ON) is input from the start device left start winning port switch 78a, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the normal symbol. It is determined that an event that triggers the lottery has occurred.

When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes the process corresponding to each event. Regarding the processing executed when the winning detection signal is input from the start device middle start winning opening switch 80, the starting device right starting winning opening switch 81, or the right starting winning opening switch 82, another flowchart is used. It will be described later.

Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or controls the execution of the first special symbol display device 34 and the first special symbol. 2 The variable display and the stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special symbol game processing will be described later using yet another flowchart.

Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (ordinary symbol lottery execution means). When the random value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol is varied and displayed by the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. Exciting to operate the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in a mode of deviation after the fluctuation display.

Further, in the present embodiment, by turning on and off the three LEDs of the normal symbol display device 33 in order, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed, and among the upper and lower three LEDs, for example, the upper LED is turned on. It is possible to display the stop at the time of non-winning with, and to display the stop at the time of winning with either of the two LEDs below turned on. Regarding which of the two LEDs below is to be turned on, the main control CPU 72 determines which LED is to be turned on, based on the hit stop symbol number determined by the hit lottery, and the stop symbol (hit symbol) by the normal symbol display device 33. The display mode of is determined.

For example, when the winning probability of a normal symbol is set to about 1 in the non-time shortened state, the distribution ratio between the winning symbol 1 and the winning symbol 2 existing in two types is "1300: 1". That is, the probability of corresponding to the winning symbol 1 is "1299/1300", and the probability of corresponding to the winning symbol 2 is "1/1300". When the hit symbol 1 is applicable, the variable start winning device 28 is short-opened (opened for 0.1 seconds), so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable start winning device 28. On the other hand, if the winning symbol 2 is applicable, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time (opened for 6.0 seconds), so that there is a chance that the variable starting winning device 28 will enter the game ball even in the non-time shortened state. Occurs.

By setting the distribution rate of the winning symbol in this way, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol fluctuates 1300 times, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time at a rate of about once. In the time-reduced state, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time regardless of whether it corresponds to the winning symbol 1 or the winning symbol 2. In this case, the opening pattern can be different between the hit symbol 1 and the hit symbol 2. Further, when the variable start winning device 28 is long-opened in the non-time shortened state, the main control CPU 72 transmits a variable start winning device long open start command to the effect control device 124.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. In this process, the number of prize balls is instructed to the payout control device 92 based on the prize detection signals input from the various switches 78a, 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203). Outputs the prize ball instruction command. The number of prize balls can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the game. For example, the number of prize balls in the starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four, the number of winning balls in the starting winning opening corresponding to the normal symbol is one, and the first large winning opening. The number of prize balls in the second major winning opening is 15, and the number of prize balls in the normal winning opening is 4. Information regarding the number of prize balls can also be transmitted to the effect control device 124 as a prize ball content command.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the starting port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the starting port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the conditions are satisfied, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S207a: The main control CPU 72 executes the solenoid management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the operations of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491 that are always movable from the time the power is turned on.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, start port) to the hall computer (external device) of the amusement park through the external terminal board 160. Information etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer.

In this embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a device or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time, and even if they are not won. Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, time shortening function operating). And store these in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. It controls the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the above-mentioned special symbol game processing (step S205) or normal symbol game processing (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, or the like is performed).

Step S211: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes an output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208) to the port. Further, the main control CPU 72 is a drive signal and a test signal of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the specific area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer. Etc. and output to the port.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command required for effect control) in the command buffer, and if there is an untransmitted command, the command to be output is output. Output to the port.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in the CTC interrupt this time.

In this embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 are executed as timer interrupt processes is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores the value (01H) for specifying the interrupt end in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

Steps S215 and S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After that, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 18). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the start device middle start winning opening switch 80 or the starting device right starting winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the first special symbol. do. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the right-starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game (during the small hit game). On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol or the start device left start winning opening switch 78a. When the input of this detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S24. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S24: The main control CPU 72 executes the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol storage update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current normal symbol operating storage number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, it is necessary for the normal symbol lottery. Various random number values (ordinary random numbers per symbol, etc.) are acquired. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operation storage number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired various random number values in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the passage detection signal is input from the specific area switch 83 corresponding to the specific area 31x in the second special winning opening 31b. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 to execute a process of turning on the specific area preliminary flag. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 18).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol storage update process (step S12 in FIG. 19). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (set number) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the jackpot determined random number and the jackpot symbol are in each section. Random numbers can be stored as a set (set) one by one. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 19). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation storage number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value thereof. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, means for acquiring the lottery element). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random number values relating to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). Means, means for acquiring lottery elements). Similarly, the acquisition of these random numbers is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (1st lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fourth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. This determination is made in the present embodiment because the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: When the case is not during the big hit (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the special symbol lottery and the fluctuation time are set in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively. This is for determining the content of the production (so-called "look-ahead"). In this process, the result of the pre-determination of the first special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command (look-ahead information).

Step S38: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower bytes of the special figure destination determination effect command (information on whether or not the command is correct or information on the fluctuation time) are set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper bytes are combined with the lower bytes here. By doing so, for example, a command with a length of one word will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the working memory number this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the working memory number "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it increases by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", respectively, and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. In this process, the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory number increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 (. Memory count notification means).

When the above procedure is completed or the number of first special symbol operation storages has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 19).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol storage update process (step S16 in FIG. 19). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation storage counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 19). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation storage number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation storage number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation storage number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 20), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the second lottery element, means for acquiring the lottery element). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element). Acquisition means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (2nd lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the big hit (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judgment. In this process, the result of the pre-determination of the second special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command.

Step S47: When the acquisition time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper byte portion (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46), here, for example, one word length is obtained by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte. Command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the increased operating memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, regarding the second special symbol, a special figure destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect command, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like are transmitted to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means). Further, when the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 19).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 20, step S46 in FIG. 21) (preliminary determination). Means, look-ahead processing execution means). As described above, this process performs the first special symbol (when the ball enters the start device middle start winning opening 452 or the start device right start winning opening 450) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). ) Is executed for each. Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process relating to the first special symbol or the process relating to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the random number value for the first determination. The random number to be loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 20) or the second special symbol storage update process (step S45 in FIG. 21). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, prior determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command (look-ahead information) for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The variation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of operation of the "time reduction function". For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-reach variation (non-shortening variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if it exists. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not activated (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of a small hit, in the same manner as the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 20) or second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 21). On the other hand, in the determination of step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 20) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 21). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and it is determined from the result which winning symbol corresponds to. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S78.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For the special symbol destination determination value, for example, "00H" is set when it corresponds to "a symbol that does not shift to the time reduction state", and "01H" is set if it corresponds to "a symbol that shifts to the time reduction state". .. In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol storage update process (FIG. 20) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 21).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 18) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game processing. The special symbol game process includes execution selection process (step S1000), special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), special symbol change process (step S3000), special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and variable winning device management process. (Step S5000) is a configuration including a group of subroutines (program modules). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variation display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is changing. If the processing is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the processing during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol change preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the change display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol.

Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and a stop display of a special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit or small hit mode (a mode other than the non-winning mode) in the previous special symbol stop display process. The big hit game or the small hit game is started according to the mode in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Big hit game]
For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a three-round jackpot, a jackpot game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the first large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, for 29 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 3 times). The first variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30, the player is given an opportunity to collectively win a large number of prize balls (special game execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a big hit is referred to as a "round", and if the number of continuous operations is three in total, these may be collectively referred to as "three rounds". In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the three-round jackpot. As the type of jackpot, not only the jackpot of 3 rounds but also the jackpot of other rounds may be provided.

Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the opening / closing of the first variable winning device 30 for one round. The value of the round count counter is incremented by 1 each time the operation is terminated. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 18). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) only for that round.

Then, when the big hit game is finished, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (time shortened state) after the big hit game is finished (time shortened state transition means) based on the game state flag (time shortening function operation flag). In the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the lottery probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is set from the normal probability (low probability) to the high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the variable start prize is won. The opening time of the device 28 is extended and the number of times of opening is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed). On the other hand, in the "non-time reduction state (predetermined game state)", the main control CPU 72 does not activate the time reduction function (because the so-called electric chew support is not performed), so that the first special symbol lottery lottery opportunity (first). It is possible to make the lottery opportunity (second lottery opportunity) of the second special symbol lottery different from the one (1 lottery opportunity) less likely to occur than the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol lottery (difficulty means). It should be noted that a gaming machine including elements of a so-called two-kind gaming machine (for example, a one-kind two-kind mixer or a two-kind gaming machine, that is, a big hit game is executed by passing a game ball through a specific area during a small hit game. In the gaming machine), the winning probability of the normal symbol operation lottery may not be shifted to the high probability state. In this case, the winning probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is a constant probability (for example, approximately 1/1) regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is activated, and the open pattern of the variable start winning device 28 makes it easy to win. Difficulty can be adjusted.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 is in a normal gaming state when the execution condition of the jackpot is satisfied (when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the jackpot). It is possible to shift from the (first state) to the jackpot gaming state (second state) different from the normal gaming state (state transition means).

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When the small hit is won, the small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game execution means). For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, a small hit game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 operates for a certain period of time (for example, for 1.8 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of operations (for example, once or multiple times). Excited, the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (operation of a special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to acquire a certain amount of prize balls (special game execution means).

Further, in the variable winning device management process during the small hit game, the specific region solenoid 99 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) for a preset number of operations (for example, once), thereby for the specific region. The slide member 31c opens and closes in a fixed pattern. By passing the game ball through the specific area 31x during this period, the player is given an opportunity to start the big hit game. That is, whether or not the big hit game is started in the variable winning device management process is determined by whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game. In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the small hit, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, the big hit game according to the winning type is started.

Further, even if the small hit game ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 31x, the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state" is not given (hence). It is not a prerequisite for.). If a small hit is won in the "time reduction state", the "time reduction state" may be terminated after the small hit game is completed.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, "2 round jackpot", "3 round jackpot 1, 2", "4 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot", and "10 round jackpot" are provided as a plurality of winning types. "2 round jackpot" and "3 round jackpot 1, 2" are started when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of jackpot, while "4 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot" and "10 round jackpot" are started. Is started when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, and the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game. Of the "4 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot" and "10 round jackpot", the second variable winning device 31 operates in the first round, and the first variable winning device 30 operates in the remaining rounds.

The above-mentioned winning types correspond to the types of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that are stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "3 round jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "1st winning symbol", "3 round jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "2nd winning symbol", and "2 round jackpot" corresponds to "3rd winning symbol". Corresponds to the big hit of "design". In addition, "10 round big hit" corresponds to the small hit of "4th winning symbol" (big hit when passing the specific area 31x), and "7 round big hit" corresponds to the small hit of "5th winning symbol" (passing the specific area 31x). Corresponds to the big hit of the time), and the "4 round big hit" corresponds to the small hit of the "6th winning symbol" (the big hit when passing through the specific area 31x). Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[1st winning symbol]
In the process of displaying the stop of the special symbol, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "first winning symbol", the big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the third round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "first winning symbol" is a big hit game in which three rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. Further, when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round, the first large winning opening 30b is closed without waiting for the lapse of the longest opening time (hereinafter, the same applies). .. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 6 times).

[2nd winning symbol]
When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "second winning symbol" in the processing during the special symbol stop display, the big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the third round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "second winning symbol" is a big hit game in which three rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 100 times).

[Third winning symbol]
When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "third winning symbol" in the processing during the special symbol stop display, the big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the second round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "third winning symbol" is a big hit game in which two rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 100 times).

[4th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fourth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "fourth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player nine rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 6 times).

[Fifth winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fifth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the seventh round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "fifth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player six rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 6 times).

[6th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "sixth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the fourth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "sixth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player three rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 6 times).

As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of which of the winning symbols is applicable, the game shifts to the "time reduction state" after the big hit game is completed. In addition, it may be possible to shift to the "time reduction state" only for a part of the winning symbols among the plurality of winning symbols.

In this way, a small hit is won by an internal lottery, and when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game is executed, and after the big hit game is completed, the time is shortened according to the type of the winning symbol. The gaming machine is a so-called one-kind two-kind mixed type gaming machine.

In this way, when the game ball is launched into the left-handed area (first area) and a big hit (predetermined first winning) is applied, the main control CPU 72 enables the big hit game (first game) to be executed (1st game). First game execution means).

Further, when the game ball is launched into the right-handed area (second area) and a small hit (predetermined second winning) is applied, the main control CPU 72 may lead to a small hit game (second). (Game) can be executed (second game execution means).

Further, when the game ball is fired in the left-handed area (first area) and the winning symbol 2 wins (predetermined third win) in the normal symbol lottery, the main control CPU 72 wins a small hit (predetermined third win). 2 The open game (third game) of the variable start winning device 28 that may correspond to (winning) can be executed (third game execution means).

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a command for demo effect. The demo effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 18). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process (second lottery priority execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers, etc.) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol (so-called priority). digestion). At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections (only the first special symbol is applicable), the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then erases (consumes) the remaining random numbers by 1. Move (shift) to the previous section one by one. The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads out the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol. It should be noted that a control in which random numbers are simply read out in the order in which they are stored may be adopted without setting such a priority for each special symbol (so-called forward digestion). Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that shifts the random number) stored in the RAM 76. The latter value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18), the display mode of the stored number by the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is changed (decreased by 1). .. After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol change preprocessing, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than "0" (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 24), the main control CPU 72. Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the working memory corresponding to the second special symbol remains. This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the second special symbol operation storage number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 1 or more (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates a second special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 0 (step S2210: No), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the target special symbol for shifting the storage area. do. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol specified in either step S2212 or step S2214 above. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working storage counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the "working memory number at the start of fluctuation" may be set after adding the values of the working memory counters.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special symbol to be shifted the storage area this time is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a command having a length of one word, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the decrease with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ") Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logical sum) with an added value (for example," 10H ") meaning" decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption ". Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit becomes "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: When the target of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation storage number reduction effect command set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (storage number notification means).
After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 24).

[See Fig. 24: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution). means). If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

In this way, when the lottery trigger (first lottery trigger) of the first special symbol lottery occurs (when the game ball enters the starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol), the main control CPU 72 has the first special symbol. A lottery (first lottery) is executed (first lottery execution means), and in a non-time shortened state (predetermined game state), a lottery opportunity for a second special symbol that is less likely to occur than a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol lottery (a predetermined game state). When the second lottery opportunity) occurs, the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) is executed (second lottery execution means).

When the above jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (first). Lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The "small hit" here is something other than a non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the above-mentioned "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. The "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating only the second variable winning device 31 (the condition for operating the condition device is not satisfied). Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the "small hit", it is positioned to develop into a "big hit" (the condition for operating the condition device is satisfied). In any case, if the read random value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be made while comparing with the random number value.

In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the big hit is set to 1/319, and the winning of the small hit is not set. Further, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the big hit is set to 1/319 of the same, and the probability of winning the small hit is set to 1/6. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit. In order to satisfy the winning probability of the big hit and the winning probability of the small hit, the range of the big hit value and the range of the small hit value are set by the main control CPU 72 and compared with the read random value.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) based on the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 18).

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be left, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to a variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) (not shown), and executes a variation pattern determination process at the time of loss (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the variation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the variation time required for the variation display. Fluctuation patterns include various fluctuation patterns such as normal fluctuation (non-reach fluctuation), reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc. (the same applies to big hits and small hits). It should be noted that the information regarding the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a variation pattern command including the information as to whether or not it is a special variation (the same applies to the case of a big hit or the time of a small hit). ).

Here, since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is in the above-mentioned "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and the current state is "time reduction state". Check if it is in "state". Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the fluctuation for executing the reach effect is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display). 2 pieces → about 5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display 3 pieces → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

The fluctuation pattern includes various fluctuation patterns such as a non-reach fluctuation pattern, a reach fluctuation pattern, a super reach fluctuation pattern, and the like (the same applies to a large hit and a small hit). The fluctuation pattern selection table may have different table contents according to the number of working memories at the start of fluctuations, or may have common table contents regardless of the number of working memories at the start of fluctuations, and may be a table according to the winning type at the time of winning. It may be the content.

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 29.0 seconds depending on the number of operation memories at the start of fluctuation), whereas the "reach fluctuation" corresponds to. The "pattern" corresponds to a longer fluctuation time (for example, about 30.0 seconds to 150.0 seconds).

The fluctuation pattern may be a fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous notice effect (pseudo-ream) is executed. The pseudo-continuous notice effect is an effect in which the effect symbol changes once or a plurality of times in a pseudo manner during one change of the special symbol.

Here, the pseudo 1 variation (pseudo 1: 1st pseudo variation) is a variation in which the pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed once, and the pseudo 2 variation (pseudo 2: 2nd pseudo variation). Pseudo-variation) is a variation in which the pseudo-variation of the effect symbol is executed twice. Further, the pseudo 3 variation (pseudo 3: 3rd pseudo variation) is a variation in which the pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed 3 times, and the pseudo 4 variation (pseudo 4: 4th pseudo variation). (Fluctuation) is a variation in which a pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed four times.

The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is missed (when other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). , The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of a big hit (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the big hit symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, three types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the first special symbol is "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol", and the breakdown of the second special symbol is only "third winning symbol". In addition, each winning symbol of these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "first winning symbol", "first winning symbol A", "first winning symbol B", "first winning symbol C", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a constituent column of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "99" and "1" are the ratios when the denominator is 100. Equivalent to. Further, in the second column from the left, a "first winning symbol" and a "second winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "first winning symbol" is 99/100 (= 99%), and the ratio of selecting the "second winning symbol" is 100 minutes. 1 (= 1%) of. The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the big hit symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Select the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, and among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H" and "02H" of the lower byte represent the types of the corresponding winning symbols in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol and "first winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". It will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Number of time reductions]
In the column on the right side of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown. In the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 6 times (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time is normal (non-time reduction state) or time reduction (time reduction state). ) Granted.

In addition, in the case of falling under the "second winning symbol", the number of time reductions is 100 times (or 104 times) regardless of whether it is during normal or time reduction. The number of time reductions is not limited to the above value, and may be 1 to 5 times, or 7 times or more (11 times or more).

Here, "6 times (or 10 times)" means that when the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 6 times or the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 10 times, it is time. It means that the shortened state ends.

Further, "100 times (or 104 times)" means that the time is shortened when the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 100 times or the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 104 times. It means that the state ends.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a constituent column of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. .. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "third winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value is shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "third winning symbol" is 100/100 (= 100%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is specified as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value and EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It shows that it is. Further, the EVENT value "01H" of the lower byte represents the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol and the "third winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described by "B2H01H". ..

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Number of time reductions]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown. In the present embodiment, when the "third winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 100 times (or 104 times) regardless of whether the time reduction is normal or the time reduction.

[See Fig. 24: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the jackpot variation pattern determination process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variable time value in the variable timer and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit. In this process, when the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is the "second winning symbol" or the "third winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 is in the flag area of the RAM 76. The time reduction function operation flag as a certain game state flag is set to ON (01H) (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operation means). When the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "first winning symbol" in the non-time shortened state, the time shortening function operation flag is reset to OFF (00H), and the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "first winning symbol" in the time shortened state. In this case, the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set to ON (01H).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of a big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of a big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol at the time of a small hit (stop symbol number at the time of a small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is defined in advance in the small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of a small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately. Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit is not set for the first special symbol, but is set only for the second special symbol.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In this embodiment, three types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a small hit. The breakdown of the three types is "4th winning symbol", "5th winning symbol", and "6th winning symbol". In addition, these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "4th winning symbol", "4th winning symbol A", "4th winning symbol B", "4th winning symbol C", and so on.

[Second special symbol stop symbol selection table at small hit]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a constituent column of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "50", "14", "36" has the denominator. It corresponds to the ratio when it is set to 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "fourth winning symbol", the "fifth winning symbol", and the "sixth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a small hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "fourth winning symbol" is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting the "fifth winning symbol". Is 14/100 (= 14%), and the ratio of selecting the "sixth winning symbol" is 36/100 (= 36%).

As a result of this small hit, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selectively determines the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. In the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is specified as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value and EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is a small hit of the second special symbol. It shows that it is a thing. Further, the EVENT values "02H", "03H", and "04H" of the lower byte represent the types of the corresponding winning symbols in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the "fourth winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol as a result of this small hit, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H02H".

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the small hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Number of time reductions]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the big hit game is started, and the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game is given. The value of is shown. In the present embodiment, when the "4th winning symbol", "5th winning symbol" or "6th winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 6 times (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time is normal or the time reduction. Times) Granted.

By using the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, and the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 is in a non-time shortened state or If the time is shortened and the "1st winning symbol to the 6th winning symbol" is applicable (only when the big hit game is executed for the 4th winning symbol to the 6th winning symbol), the time is shortened. It is possible that the migration conditions are satisfied (migration condition setting means).

[See Fig. 24: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the small hit time variation pattern determination process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variable time value in the variable timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the small hit is set only for the second special symbol lottery, and at the time of the small hit, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time for the small hit is selected. A small hit may be set for the first special symbol lottery.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 23: Processing during special symbol change, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol change processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the change timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer is changed according to the passage of time (the count number of the clock pulse or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement the value of the counter. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 24). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the stopped symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 clears the symbol changing flag.

[Fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of loss]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the deviation pattern determination process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2460: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current variation is a variation of the first special symbol.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation is the variation of the first special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2464. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the current variation is the variation of the first special symbol (No), that is, when the current variation is the variation of the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2462.

Step S2462: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the number of special fluctuations is larger than 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the number of special fluctuations is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2466. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the number of special fluctuations is larger than 0 (No), that is, when the value of the number of special fluctuations is 0, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2468.

Step S2464: The main control CPU 72 refers to the out-of-order variation pattern table for the first special symbol, and executes a process of determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

The out-of-order fluctuation pattern table for the first special symbol includes a table according to the gaming state (non-time shortening state, time shortening state) and the number of stored games, and the main control CPU 72 determines the gaming state and the number of stored games. Accordingly, the variation pattern at the time of off for the first special symbol is determined.

Step S2466: The main control CPU 72 refers to the out-of-order special variation pattern table for the second special symbol, and executes a process of determining the variation pattern (special variation pattern) of the second special symbol.

The special variation pattern table at the time of loss for the second special symbol includes a table according to the game state (non-time shortened state, time shortened state) and the number of stored games, and the main control CPU 72 is the game state and the number of stored games. The variation pattern at the time of the second special symbol is determined according to the above. For example, in the non-time shortened state, a special fluctuation pattern having an extremely short fluctuation time (about 1 second) is selected. On the other hand, in the time shortened state, a special fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of a predetermined time (several seconds to several tens of seconds) is selected. When selecting the special variation pattern, the variation pattern may be determined without considering the number of stored items.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 performs a search challenge icon display effect (specific effect) when the value of the number of special fluctuations is larger than 0 (when a predetermined condition is satisfied). It is possible to select a fluctuation pattern having an infeasible fluctuation time (a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation of about several seconds) (variation pattern selection means).

Step S2468: The main control CPU 72 refers to the out-of-order normal variation pattern table for the second special symbol, and executes a process of determining the variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern) of the second special symbol.

The out-of-order normal fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol includes a table according to the game state (non-time shortened state, time shortened state) and the number of stored games, and the main control CPU 72 is the game state and the number of stored games. The variation pattern at the time of the second special symbol is determined according to the above. For example, in the non-time shortened state, a normal fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation of about several tens of seconds) having a fluctuation time longer than the special fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation time of about 10 seconds, a fluctuation time in which a search challenge effect can be executed) is used. select. On the other hand, in the time shortened state, a normal fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of a predetermined time (several seconds to several tens of seconds) is selected. When all the time shortened states are special fluctuation patterns, the normal fluctuation pattern is not selected in the time shortened state.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 24).

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process during special symbol stop display. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 23) in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the time saving function is not activated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the normal state (non-time reduction state) is entered.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of a big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed except at the time of big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and the value is simply off (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number update process. In this process, if the number of special fluctuations is 0, no process is executed. On the other hand, when the number of special fluctuations is 1 or more, the process of decrementing (-1) the number of special fluctuations is executed. When this process is executed regardless of whether the number of special fluctuations is 0 or 1 or more, the main control CPU 72 sends a command for specifying the number of special fluctuations reflecting the value of the number of special fluctuations to the effect control device. Send.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number-cut counter. In the "count cut counter", the counter value related to the "time reduction state" is set in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76. In this embodiment, a so-called time reduction function for cutting the number of times is adopted, and when shifting to the "time reduction state", the first number of times cut counter value regarding the time reduction state is a predetermined value (for example, 6 times or 100 times). The second count cut counter value for the time reduction state is set to a specified value (for example, 10 times or 104 times). The information of the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value is notified (transmitted) to the effect control device 124 by the count cut counter command.
It should be noted that the time reduction counter value related to the time reduction state is not provided with two counter values such as the first number cut counter value and the second number cut counter value, and the time reduction state is controlled by only one counter value. May be good.

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value (first count cut counter value or second count cut counter value) is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when the number-of-counts cut counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value. Specifically, when the stop display of the second special symbol is being displayed, both the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value are decremented, and when the stop display of the first special symbol is being displayed. Decrements only the second count cut counter value.

Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result of any of the number-cutting counter values (first number-cutting counter value or second number-cutting counter value) is 0. As a result of the subtraction, if none of the counter values for cutting the number of times is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when any of the number-cutting counter values is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number-cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, the number-of-times counter value related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 6 times). Therefore, when the second special symbol missed variation (including the small hit variation at that time when the specific area is not passed) is executed 6 times in the time shortened state, the time shortening function activation flag is reset. Will be. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol is displaced six times in the time shortened state, the time saving function activation flag is not reset, and then four times the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed in the time shortened state. When the deviation fluctuation is executed, the time saving function activation flag is reset. As a result, the time reduction state ends after the stop display of the special symbol is performed. The time reduction function activation flag is described in the example of resetting when the stop display time of the special symbol has elapsed, but even if it is reset at the end of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (before the stop display time measurement starts). good.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game processing.

In this way, the end condition (predetermined end condition) of the time shortened state is when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after shifting to the time shortened state reaches the first number (for example, 6 times), or. When the total number of fluctuations, which is the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the time reduction state, reaches the second number (for example, 10 times), which is larger than the first number. It is a condition to be satisfied.

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. It is a configuration including a subroutine group of the process (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special as already described. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the time saving state display lamp 38e according to the value of the time saving function operation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the time saving function operation flag when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 is set to the time saving state display lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. A lighting signal is output to the corresponding LED. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation display lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by a big hit game or a small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f. Output. Further, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f in addition to the time saving state display lamp 38e described above. Is output. The launch position designation display lamp 38f is lit from the start of the big hit game to the end of the "time reduction state" when shifting to the "time reduction state" after the big hit game, and is not lit by the end of the "time reduction state". (OFF).

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 generates lighting signals (common output data) for the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is the combination of the display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 has all the lamps corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "10 rounds" (for example, all the lamps 38a, 38b, 38c). Generates a lighting signal for the lamp). Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "2 rounds", the main control CPU 72 generates a lighting signal for the lamp (for example, only the lamp 38a) corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "2 rounds". .. Since the three indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c can display six lighting patterns, it is possible to correspond to the five types of jackpots of the present embodiment. The details of the lighting pattern corresponding to the number of rounds are preferably displayed around the indicator lamps 38a, 38b, 38c in order to clearly convey the details to the player.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes the game process selection process (step S5100), the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300), the large winning opening closing process (step S5400), and the end. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern as the next jump destination (step). Select S5200). On the other hand, if the large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the large winning opening opening / closing operation process has been completed. Then, the large winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process and the large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set continuous operation number (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects the end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. .. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are opened and closed and the time for each opening at the time of a big hit or a small hit, respectively. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. As a result of this confirmation, when the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5203. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), that is, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5204.

Step S5203: The main control CPU 72 executes a big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the winning symbol at the time of big hit is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process. In this process, the opening pattern of the large winning opening is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of small hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5205: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the contents will be described according to a procedure example.

Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, and the "accessory continuous actuating device" is the first variable winning device 30 or the second. It is a device that can continuously operate the variable winning device 31. It should be noted that the "conditional device" and the "continuous operation device for accessories" can also be used as control flags. Therefore, unless this condition device is operating, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate in the big hit game. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5212.

Step S5212: The main control CPU 72 sets "starting big role (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol is applicable, a value representing "3 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5214.

Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol at the time of a big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of a big hit, and selects an open pattern corresponding to the type of the winning symbol related to the special symbol. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of execution rounds, the opening time, and the interval time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5216.

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit]
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of a big hit. This open pattern setting table for each big hit symbol defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 30 or second variable winning device 31) to be operated for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol. Is. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[1st winning symbol]
When the first winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is three, and three of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the first winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the third round takes 29.0 seconds during each round. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened (however, it is closed when the maximum number of winning balls is confirmed. The same shall apply hereinafter). Therefore, if it corresponds to the first winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially three rounds of balls.

[2nd winning symbol]
When the second winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is three, and three of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the second winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the third round takes 29.0 seconds during each round. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the second winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially three rounds of balls.

[Third winning symbol]
When the third winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is two, and two of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the third winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the second round takes 29.0 seconds during each round. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if the third winning symbol is applicable, it is possible to obtain substantially two rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol by referring to the opening pattern setting table for each big hit symbol.

[Refer to Fig. 34: Big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
Step S5216: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated for each round (1st round to the final round) during the big hit game to the 1st variable winning device 30 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. do. In this embodiment, since the opening pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (1st winning symbol to 3rd winning symbol) at the time of big hit is 1 round to the final round, the 1st big winning opening 30b is opened. The operation of the first variable winning device 30 is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5218.

Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. For example, 3 rounds are set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the 3-land jackpot (first winning symbol and second winning symbol). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5220.

Step S5220: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each round when the big winning opening is opened at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for a round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the opening timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5222.

Step S5222: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In this embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, after the opening of the first big winning opening 30b between the first round and the second round is completed and the first round is closed once, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5224.

Step S5224: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5218). For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "3 rounds", so that the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "3 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 33).

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5252: The main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit game in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5254.

Step S5254: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit opening pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the small hit opening pattern setting table and selects an opening pattern. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of times of opening, the opening time, the interval time, and the opening time of the specific area 31x. ing. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5256.

[Open pattern setting table for small hits]
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. This small hit opening pattern setting table defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (second variable winning device 31). In this embodiment, one open pattern is set at the time of a small hit, but a plurality of open patterns may be specified for each winning symbol.

When it corresponds to a small hit, the variable winning device to be operated is the second variable winning device 31. Further, the number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened is two, and the opening time of one time is 0.9 seconds. The interval time is set to, for example, about 1.0 second.

The opening start time of the specific region 31x (timing at which the specific region solenoid 99 is turned on to operate the slide member 31c for the specific region) is 0.2 seconds after the opening start of the second variable winning device 31.
Further, the opening end time of the specific area 31x (timing at which the specific area solenoid 99 is turned off to deactivate the slide member 31c for the specific area) is 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. ..

[Refer to Fig. 36: Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
Step S5256: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the second variable winning device 31. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated during the small hit game in the second variable winning device 31 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5258.

Step S5258: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening to be executed during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, two times are set as the number of times the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit is opened. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5260.

Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the large winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, 0.9 seconds is set based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5262.

Step S5262: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit time interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between the openings of the large winning openings based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, the interval timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5264.

Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets an release timer for the specific area 31x (specific area slide member 31c). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) of the specific area 31x during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In the present embodiment, the specific area 31x is opened 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x is closed 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. Will be done.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 33).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current internal state is “in a big role”. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer of the RAM 76, and the current internal state is "" depending on whether or not the "big win (big hit game)" flag is set as the internal state flag for control. Check if it is a big role. In addition, the flag of "during big win (during big hit game)" is set by the main control CPU 72 during the previous processing (during the process of setting the big winning opening pattern at the time of big hit: step S5212) and during the processing when passing through a specific area described later. .. As a result of this confirmation, when the current internal state is "Major role" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5306. On the other hand, when the current internal state is not "Major role" (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the second prize opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the second variable winning device 31 in order to open and close the second winning opening 31b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the second winning opening solenoid 97). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S5306: The main control CPU 72 executes the first large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the first variable winning device 30 in order to open and close the first winning opening 30b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the first winning opening solenoid 90). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 32).

[2nd prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second prize opening opening / closing operation process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described according to a procedure example.

Step S5310: The main control CPU 72 opens the second special winning opening 31b by the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the release timer set in the previous process (step S5260 or step S5264 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 36)). In this process, in addition to the opening timer for opening the second special winning opening 31b, a countdown for the opening timer (opening start time, opening end time) for opening the specific area 31x is performed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5314.

Step S5314: The main control CPU 72 executes the specific area opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the slide member 31c for the specific area in order to open / close the specific area 31x based on the set opening pattern (outputs a drive signal applied to the specific area solenoid 99). Perform processing. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5316.

Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the second large winning opening 31b during the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. On the other hand, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second variable winning device 31 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5320.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening at the time of a small hit. If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the above steps S5310 to S5320.

When it is determined in step S5316 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5320 that the count number has reached a predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. Since the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds) for the release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally indicates that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5316 that the opening time has ended before confirmation.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 closes the second grand prize opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5324.

Step S5324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76, and confirms whether or not the specific area passing flag is ON depending on whether or not the value of the specific area passing flag is 01H. As a result of this confirmation, when the specific area passage flag is ON (Yes), that is, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main The control CPU 72 then executes step S5326. On the other hand, when the specific area passage flag is not ON (No), that is, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main control The CPU 72 then executes step S5327a. The specific area passage flag may be set to ON in the specific area opening / closing operation process (step S5314).

Step S5326: The main control CPU 72 executes a process when passing through a specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific region 31x while the second big winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open. , The process of continuously operating the first variable winning device 30, that is, the process of starting the big hit game (special game execution means via special game, special game execution means). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5327a: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the previous process (step S5265 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 36)). Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5327b. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device, which is the caller from step S5327a, for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 32). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5327a is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5310.

Step S5327b: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter. The value of the second large winning opening opening count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5327c: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of, for example, "opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small hit". Is. In particular, when such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round, so that the counter value is set by one opening / closing operation. Since the set number of times is reached (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5328.

On the other hand, when the opening pattern of "opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small hit" is adopted, the counter value has still reached the set number of times at the end of one opening. There will be no (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5310 to S5327b are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the open count counter progresses in step S5327b, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (step S5327c; Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5328: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 38). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Specific area opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described according to a procedure example.

Step S5330: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has started. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer for the release start time related to the release of the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, thereby confirming whether or not the value of the release timer is 0. Check if the 31x opening time has started. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is started (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5332. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not been started (No), or if it has already been opened, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5332: The main control CPU 72 opens the specific area 31x. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is output. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific region operates, and the specific region 31x shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5334: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area 31x. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the storage area of the RAM 76 and confirms whether or not the specific area spare flag is ON. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is ON and the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5336. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is OFF and the game ball has not passed through the specific area 31x (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5338.

Step S5336: The main control CPU 72 sets the specific area passage flag to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and sets the value of the specific area passage flag to 01H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338. The specific area passage flag and the specific area reserve flag are reset at the end of the big hit game.

Step S5338: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has expired. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer for opening the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, so that the opening time of the specific area 31x is set. Check if it is finished. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5340. On the other hand, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 39).

Step S5340: The main control CPU 72 closes the specific area 31x. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is stopped. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific region returns from the open state (operating state) to the closed state (non-operating state).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 39).

[Processing when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when passing through a specific area. Hereinafter, the contents will be described according to a procedure example.

Step S5350: The main control CPU 72 resets the small hit flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and resets the value of the small hit flag to 00H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5352.

Step S5352: The main control CPU 72 ends the small hit game. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 erases "small hit game in progress" from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game on the control process (small hit end). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5354.

Step S5354: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 can be continuously operated, and the big hit game can be started. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5356.

Step S5356: The main control CPU 72 sets "starting big role (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of the winning symbol. For example, when the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol is the same, a value representing "3 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5358.

Step S5358: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol when passing through a specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol when a small hit is applied. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5360.

Step S5360: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 is a variable winning device that operates every round (2 rounds to the final round) during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. The type is set to the first variable winning device 30. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5362.

Step S5362: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. For example, "10 rounds" is set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the fourth winning symbol. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5364.

Step S5364: The main control CPU 72 sets a jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each round when the big winning opening is opened at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (4th winning symbol to 6th winning symbol) related to the special symbol when the small hit is applied. For example, in the case of the 4th winning symbol, the opening time for opening the 1st big winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for the round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the opening timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5366.

Step S5366: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In this embodiment, 1.0 second is set as an interval timer of an open pattern corresponding to a winning symbol (4th winning symbol to 6th winning symbol) related to a special symbol when a small hit is applied. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first large winning opening 30b between the second round and the third round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5368.

Step S5368: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5362). For example, in the case of the fourth winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so that the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5370.

Step S5370: The main control CPU 72 executes a time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through a specific area. In this process, when the winning symbols related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit are "4th winning symbol" to "6th winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the time reduction function operation flag to ON (time). Shortened state transition means, time shortened function operating means). In the present embodiment, when the game ball corresponds to the "fourth winning symbol" to the "sixth winning symbol" and passes through the specific area 31x, the time is always shortened. Only the winning symbols may be shifted to the time reduction state.

Step S5372: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets "10" for the number of special fluctuations when setting "6" as the number of time reductions, and sets "104" when setting "100" as the number of time reductions. Execute the process. The reason why the value obtained by adding "4" to the number of time reductions is that the change of the second special symbol (change of the remaining hold) after the time reduction state ends is regarded as a special change.

Then, the number of special fluctuations is decremented (-1) when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the number of special fluctuations takes a value of "104 to 5", the special fluctuation pattern for the time reduction state of the second special symbol is selected. When the number of special fluctuations takes a value of "4 to 1", the special fluctuation pattern for the non-time shortened state of the second special symbol is selected. Further, when the number of special fluctuations takes a value of "0", the normal fluctuation pattern for the non-time shortened state of the second special symbol is selected.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 39).

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. This open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area defines an opening / closing operation pattern of the first variable winning device 30 for each round for each different winning symbol related to a special symbol when a small hit is hit. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[4th winning symbol]
When the game ball corresponds to the fourth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. The number of execution rounds is 10 rounds. Since the number of execution rounds includes the operation of the second variable winning device 31 opened by a small hit, in the big hit game to be started from now on, 9 rounds in which 1 round is subtracted from 10 rounds are included. It is the number of rounds in the actual jackpot game (hereinafter, the same applies to the 5th winning symbol and the 6th winning symbol). In addition, 9 out of 9 rounds are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the fourth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable winning device 30 operates during each round for 29.0 seconds, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the 4th winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to obtain substantially 9 rounds of balls.

[Fifth winning symbol]
When the game ball corresponds to the fifth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 7 (the number of rounds in a substantial jackpot game is 6), and 6 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the fifth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the seventh round, the first variable winning device 30 operates during each round for 29.0 seconds, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the fifth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to obtain substantially six rounds of balls.

[6th winning symbol]
When the game ball corresponds to the sixth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 4 (the number of rounds in a substantial jackpot game is 3), and 3 of them are rounds with a ball. The opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds, and the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the sixth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is 29. It operates during each round for 0 seconds to open the first prize opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the sixth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to substantially obtain three rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the large winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit, with reference to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area. Will be done.

[First prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the first special winning opening. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5380: The main control CPU 72 opens the first grand prize opening 30b by the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5382.

Step S5382: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5220 of the big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 34) or step S5364 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 41)). Executes the countdown of the open timer. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5386.

Step S5386: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the first large winning opening 30b has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the first large winning opening 30b after the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. On the other hand, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5388.

Step S5388: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the first variable winning device 30 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5390.

Step S5390: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during the big hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the above steps S5380 to S5390.

If it is determined in step S5386 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5390 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. When the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the main control CPU 72 usually steps before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5390. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended in S5386.

Step S5392: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5394.

Step S5394: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5222 of the big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 34) or step S5366 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 41)). Executes the countdown of the interval timer. Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5395. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5394 for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 32). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5394 is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5380.

Step S5395: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5396: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of, for example, "opening the first variable winning device 30 multiple times in one round during the big hit". Is. Since such an opening pattern is not particularly adopted in this embodiment, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, since the counter value normally reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5398.

When the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted as described above, the counter value has not reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5380 to S5390 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5395, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5398.

Step S5398: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 38). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closure process]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening closing process. This large winning opening closing process is for continuing or terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is in a big win (big hit game), and if it is in a big role (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5402.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached. If the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the big hit game is started after the small hit is completed, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b at the time of the small hit is treated as the first round, and the big hit is performed. The first round in which the game is started is treated as the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after the increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (14 or 15 after 1 subtraction) ( No), then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 32). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, the main control CPU 72 again executes the large winning opening closing process, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds.

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[At the time of small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the value of the open count counter is incremented.

Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the set open count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5258 in FIG. 36). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 32). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, and the main control CPU 72 again executes the large winning opening closing process, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S5416. , Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of opening times reaches the set number of opening times.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5414.

Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the open count counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the termination process. This termination process is for adjusting the conditions for terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the jackpot flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5503. do.

Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets (00H) the jackpot flag. As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit in progress" from the internal state flag here, and ends the big hit game on the control process (end of big win). The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (whether it is set). This flag is used for the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 24) during the previous special symbol change preprocessing, and the time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through the specific area during the previous specific area passage process (FIG. It is set in step S5370) in 41.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 6 times (or 10 times), 100 times (or 104 times)). do. The set time reduction count value is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, in order to manage the number of times of time reduction, two types of time reduction counter values (first number of times cut counter value and second number of times cut counter value) are prepared. Here, the first number-of-times cut counter value is a variable that is decremented (subtracted by 1) each time the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "6" or "100" is set as an initial value. The second special symbol value is a variable that is decremented each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "10" or "104" is set as an initial value. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not 01H (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute steps S5512 and S5513.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 wins when the condition for shifting to the time shortened state is satisfied (when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, when the winning symbol for shifting to the time shortened state is won). ), After the end of the jackpot game, advantageous conditions were applied from the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state) to the non-time shortened state (the variable time of the normal symbol lottery was shortened, and the variable start winning device It is possible to shift to a time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) (means for shifting to advantageous gaming state) (opening time is extended).

Step S5513: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number setting process. This process is the same as the process of step S5372 in FIG.

The procedure up to this point is for a big hit, but in the case of a small hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

Step S5520, Step S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets (00H) the value of the small hit flag, and also deletes "small hit game in progress" from the internal state flag. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on the flag. Specifically, with the reset of the jackpot flag or the end of the major winning combination, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the time reduction function activation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "time reduction in progress" is generated as an internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 23) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Solenoid management process]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the solenoid management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S2800: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the power-on operation is completed. If it is immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the operation of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491 at the time of turning on the power is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2810.

Step S2810: The main control CPU 72 executes the power-on operation process. In this process, the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491 are operated in a predetermined movable pattern. As a result, the left blade member 442 and the right blade member 438 of the start device 400 operate based on a constant movable pattern from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to the time when the power is cut off. Then, when the power-on operation is completed, it is determined in step S2800 that the operation is completed (Yes), so that step S2810 is skipped thereafter.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management processing (FIG. 18).

FIG. 47 is a timing chart showing the movable patterns of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491.

[Time t0]
The start device right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t1]
The right solenoid 481 of the start device is activated.
The start device left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t2]
The right solenoid 481 of the start device ends its operation and becomes inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t3]
The start device right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 is activated.

[Time t4]
The start device right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The left solenoid 491 of the start device ends its operation and becomes inactive.

[Time t5]
The start device right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 is inactive.

The time T1 from the time t0 to the time t1 is, for example, 50 ms.
The time T2 from the time t1 to the time t2 is, for example, 100 ms.
The time T3 from the time t2 to the time t3 is, for example, 50 ms.
The time T4 from the time t3 to the time t4 is, for example, 100 ms.
The time T5 from the time t4 to the time t5 is, for example, 500 ms.

The time TA from the time t0 to the time t5 is one cycle (for example, 800 ms), and the movable pattern of this one cycle is repeatedly executed from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the power is turned off. It should be noted that a plurality of types of movable patterns for one cycle may be prepared, and the plurality of types of movable patterns may be repeatedly executed.

By applying such a movable pattern, the game ball that has entered the start device 400 is allowed to enter the start winning opening (starting winning opening 452 in the starting device or the starting winning opening 450 in the starting device) of the first special symbol. On the other hand, it is possible to allow more game balls to enter the starting winning opening (starting device left starting winning opening 454) of the normal symbol.

Specifically, assuming that 12 game balls enter the entry slot 430 of the start device 400 in one minute, on average, two of the game balls enter the start device right start winning opening 450. Two more game balls enter the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the remaining eight game balls enter the start device left start winning opening 454.

Further, by executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 moves the left blade member 442 (movable body) and the right blade member 438 (movable body) in a predetermined movable pattern in the normal gaming state (first state). It is possible to make the left blade member 442 and the right blade member 438 continuously movable in a predetermined movable pattern even in the jackpot gaming state (second state) (control means).

[Game flow (1)]
FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol fluctuates in the normal mode.
When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode (park mode). The "normal mode" is a "non-time reduction state".

[F1] During a game in the normal mode, when the game ball enters the start winning opening 452 in the start device or the starting right starting winning opening 450 of the start device (the first in a state where the memory of the second special symbol does not exist). (If the memory of the special symbol exists), [F2] the first special symbol changes.

[F3] If the first special symbol lottery results in "missing", [F1] the normal mode is restarted.

[F4] The first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if the [F5] first winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode. [F8] The drive mode is a "time reduction state".

[F4] The first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if [F7] the second winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

In this way, if you win a big hit in the first special symbol lottery while staying in the normal mode (non-time shortened state), no matter what winning symbol corresponds to, after the big hit game is over, you will drive. Move to mode.

[Game flow (2)]
FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the normal mode.
[F1] When the game ball enters the right-start winning opening 28b during the game in the normal mode (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol changes.

[F13] If the second special symbol lottery results in "missing", [F1] the normal mode is restarted.

[F14] The second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if the [F15] third winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F17] fourth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F19] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F20] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to [F8] drive mode.

[Game flow (3)]
FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode.
[F8] During a game in the drive mode, when the game ball enters the start device left start winning opening 454 of the start device 400 or the start device middle start winning opening 452 of the start device 400 (the memory of the second special symbol exists). (If the memory of the first special symbol exists), the [F2] first special symbol fluctuates. The drive mode may be in a non-time reduction state.

[F3] If it becomes "missing" in the first special symbol lottery, it will be restarted from the state of [F8] drive mode. However, in the case of the time saving final fluctuation at which the time shortening state ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode at the end of this out-of-time fluctuation.

[F4] The first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if the [F5] first winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F4] The first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if [F7] the second winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

In this way, if you win a big hit in the first special symbol lottery while staying in the drive mode (time shortened state), no matter what winning symbol corresponds to, after the big hit game ends, the drive mode Move to.

[Game flow (4)]
FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode.
[F8] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the drive mode (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), the [F12] second special symbol changes.

[F13] If the second special symbol lottery results in "missing", the operation is restarted from the [F8] drive mode. However, in the case of the time saving final fluctuation at which the time reduction state ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode at the end of this out-of-time fluctuation.

[F14] The second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if the [F15] third winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F17] fourth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F19] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F20] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to [F8] drive mode.

In this way, if you win in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of whether you are staying in the normal mode (non-time reduction state) or the drive mode (time reduction state), after the big hit game is over, , Move to drive mode.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 and the display mode of the 7-segment display device 200 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the internal lottery of the big hit is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they are not visually appealing. Similarly, the mode of the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 is a symbolic design by a 7-segment LED or the like, and is a “winning symbol”. The visual impact as "is poor. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect and a stop display effect are performed using the liquid crystal display 42 and the 7-segment display device 200.

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 42 displays the effect symbol Hz (this symbol), the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the background image corresponding to the stay mode, the image related to the notice effect, and the like, and the 7-segment display device 200. The 7-segment production design is displayed on the screen.

The effect symbol Hz displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 includes, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, and these are left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Displayed side by side. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed on each effect symbol. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all form a symbol sequence (effect symbol arrangement) in which the numbers are arranged in descending order from "9" to "1". Such symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

The 7-segment effect symbol displayed on the 7-segment display device 200 includes, for example, a 7-segment effect symbol on the left side, a 7-segment effect symbol in the center, and a 7-segment effect symbol on the right side. It is displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the display area of the device 200. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed on each effect symbol. Here, each of the 7-segment effect symbols constitutes a symbol sequence (effect symbol arrangement) in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

52 and 53 are continuous views showing an example of an effect image corresponding to a variable display and a stop display of a special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the fluctuation display effect and the stop display effect performed by using the liquid crystal display 42 and the 7-segment display device 200 is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) to the stop display (including the fixed stop). Further, the stop display effect is an effect indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed and that the result of the internal lottery at that time has been displayed. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 52 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), there are three columns of effect symbol Hz in the upper right region of the liquid crystal display 42. It is displayed. At this time, the effect symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Further, a fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed in the upper right area of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the above-mentioned left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variation display of the effect symbol Hz. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed in response to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. It is a thing. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "big hit" or "small hit" instead of "missing", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are displayed in the corresponding modes (for example, blue display color, red display color, etc.). Is displayed as stopped.

In the 7-segment display device 200, the 7-segment effect symbol is stopped and displayed in an out-of-order manner ("4"-"6"-"7").

Further, in the storage display device 300, since all four LEDs of the first special symbol storage display area M1 are lit, it indicates that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and the second special symbol storage. Since all the LEDs in the display area M2 are turned off, it indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 52 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is started, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is scrolled. By doing so, the variable display effect is started. It should be noted that the variable display of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 and the variable display of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are simply indicated by downward arrows.

A background image is displayed in the central area of the liquid crystal display 42, and this background image represents the scenery of the park. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". The "normal mode" is a non-time reduction state. In addition to this, various modes are provided for production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the internal "time saving state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the special symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color thereof. ..

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of LEDs in the first special symbol storage display area M1 decreases from four to three in conjunction with the decrease. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the memory of the first special symbol has been reduced to three, and the memory corresponding to any special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) is consumed. It is possible to teach in an easy-to-understand manner what was done.

Further, before the start of the fluctuation, the LED of the storage display area X1 is not lit, but after the start of the fluctuation, the LED of the storage display area X1 is lit, and the fluctuation of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed. Keeps lighting until.

[Stop the left effect design]
(C) in FIG. 52: For example, after a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, first, the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect symbol Hz on the left side of the liquid crystal display 42 are left. The production pattern stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number "8" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the number "8" is used as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol that represents is stopped.

[Stop right production design]
In FIG. 53 (D): Next, the effect symbol representing the number "3" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is on the right. As a result, the production symbol representing the number "3" has stopped.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 53 (E): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. When the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of non-winning (missing), the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is also produced by the liquid crystal display 42. Similarly, the symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) manner. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number "1" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol in the center of the 7-segment display device 200, and the number is used as the medium effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol representing "1" is stopped. In this case, since the combination of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are both "8"-"1"-"3", this fluctuation is normal. It is expressed in the production that it corresponds to the "off" of. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the LED of the storage display area X1 is turned off. As a result, it is possible to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the change of the special symbol has been completed".

The above is an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed for each change. Through such an effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for winning, and finally to clearly teach the result of the internal lottery in the effect.

[Example of production when hit symbol 2 is applicable]
FIGS. 54 to 57 are continuous diagrams showing an example of an effect when the result of the normal symbol lottery in the non-time shortened state corresponds to the winning symbol 2.

[Before the start of variable display production]
In FIG. 54 (A): In the 7-segment display device 200, the 7-segment effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a detached mode (“9”-“1”-“6”). Further, on the liquid crystal display 42, the effect symbol Hz is stopped and displayed in an out-of-order manner ("9"-"1"-"6").

Further, in the storage display device 300, since one LED of the first special symbol storage display area M1 is lit, it indicates that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is one, and the second special symbol storage display. Since all the LEDs in the area M2 are turned off, it indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0.

Further, a normal symbol lottery area is arranged at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The normal effect symbol Fz is displayed in the normal symbol lottery area, and the normal effect symbol Fz fluctuates in response to the variable display of the normal symbol and stops in response to the stop display of the normal symbol.

In the ordinary effect symbol Fz, a plurality of figures (circular figure, triangular figure, square figure, etc.) are scrolled and displayed. If the result of the normal symbol lottery in the non-time shortened state corresponds to the winning symbol 2, the effect of aligning three circle figures is executed.
In the illustrated example, as the normal effect symbol Fz, three circle figures are not aligned, so that the result of the normal symbol lottery in the non-time shortened state does not correspond to the winning symbol 2.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 54 (B): When the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, the fluctuation of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is started, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is scrolled to change the display. The production starts. Since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of LEDs in the first special symbol storage display area M1 decreases from one to zero in conjunction with the decrease. As for the fluctuation of the first special symbol here, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern that is out of alignment is selected.

In the normal effect symbol Fz at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, an effect in which three circle figures are aligned is executed. This indicates that the result of the normal symbol lottery in the non-time shortened state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. Before the three normal effect symbols Fz are aligned, the reach effect is generated by the normal effect symbol Fz, the left and right symbols of the normal effect symbol Fz are blinked, and the middle symbol is scrolled at a visible speed, and finally. You may perform an effect of aligning three normal effect symbols Fz. Further, when the normal effect symbol Fz is variablely displayed, the number of payouts obtained by entering the ball into the start device left start winning opening 454 may be displayed.

[Animal chance production]
Further, in the illustrated example, an effect in which an animal character appears from the upper left position of the screen is executed. This effect is executed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the hit symbol 2 in the normal symbol display device 33. In this case, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time (opened for 6.0 seconds) even though it is in the non-time shortened state.

[Occurrence of notice production (1st stage)]
In FIG. 54 (C): After a while from the start of the fluctuation, a picture image displaying some character appears on the screen, and the advance notice effect is executed in a mode of stopping at the center of the screen. In this example, for example, a picture image appears from the left side of the screen and is moved to the center of the screen as it is.

In addition, the animal chance production is continuing, and the production is being carried out in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance right-handed." In the illustrated example, the variable start winning device 28 is operating and the game ball is flowing down toward the variable starting winning device 28.

[Occurrence of notice production (second stage)]
In FIG. 55 (D): Following the first-stage advance notice effect, the second-stage advance notice effect is executed. In the illustrated example, another picture image appears additionally from the right edge of the screen and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed picture image. By executing such a notice effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it may reach.

In addition, the animal chance production is continuing, and the production is being carried out in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance right-handed." In the illustrated example, a game ball has entered the variable start winning device 28 during operation.

[Stop the left effect design]
In FIG. 55 (E): Following the advance notice effect, the effect symbol representing the number "2" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is stopped. As the left effect symbol, the effect symbol representing the number "2" is stopped.

Further, when the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the memory of the second special symbol is increased by one, so that one LED of the second special symbol storage display area M2 is lit. When the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, it is also possible to execute an effect at the time of entry (an effect of displaying OK character information, etc.).
The variable start winning device 28 becomes inoperable after a certain period of time (6.0 seconds) has elapsed or after a predetermined number (for example, one) of winnings. In the illustrated example, the variable start winning device 28 is closed because one game ball has entered the variable start winning device 28. When the variable start winning device 28 is closed, the animal chance production ends. The specified number may be two or more.

[Exploration challenge icon display production]
When the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the search challenge icon IC is displayed on the left side of the screen. When a plurality of game balls enter the variable start winning device 28, the character information of "x2" or "x3" according to the number of entered balls may be displayed next to the search challenge icon IC. can. The search challenge icon IC suggests that the search challenge effect is executed after that. The search challenge icon IC is continuously displayed until the second special symbol changes.

[Stop right production design]
In FIG. 55 (F): Next, the effect symbol representing the number "4" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is on the right. As a result, the production symbol representing the number "4" has stopped.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 56 (G): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. When the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of non-winning (missing), the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is also produced by the liquid crystal display 42. Similarly, the symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) manner. In the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number "3" is stopped as the central 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200, and the number "3" is used as the medium effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol representing "is stopped.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 56 (H): As the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to fluctuate, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates to produce a variable display effect. It will be started. Since the number of working memories of the second special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of LEDs in the second special symbol storage display area M2 decreases from one to zero in conjunction with this. As for the fluctuation of the second special symbol here, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small hit winning is selected. Here, when the control of the preferential digestion of the second special symbol is adopted, the memory of the second special symbol is preferentially digested. On the other hand, when the control of the forward digestion of the special symbol is adopted, the change of the special symbol is executed in the order of the memory. In the illustrated example, since the memory of the first special symbol does not exist, the variation of the second special symbol is executed regardless of which control is adopted.

[Start of exploration challenge production]
When the change of the second special symbol is started, the search challenge icon IC disappears (is consumed), and the search challenge effect is started. Further, in the illustrated example, an effect in which an animal character utters the line "search challenge" is executed.

[Stop the left effect design]
In FIG. 56 (I): After a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 is stopped. As the left effect symbol of Hz, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped.

[Continued exploration challenge production]
The exploration challenge production is continuously being executed. In the illustrated example, a hermit character is performing a production that utters the line "find an animal." This means that if you can find an animal, it is a small hit (or a big hit).

[Stop right production design]
In FIG. 57 (J): Next, the effect symbol representing the number "2" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is on the right. As a result, the production symbol representing the number "2" has stopped.

[Stop the middle production design]
In FIG. 57 (K): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. When the result of this internal lottery is a small hit and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is also the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. Similarly, the stop display effect is performed in the form of a small hit. In the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the alphabet "A" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol in the center of the 7-segment display device 200, and the alphabet "A" is used as the medium effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol that represents "is stopped. Further, the liquid crystal display 42 displays a large animal character. This makes it possible to convey to the player that "it was a small hit via an animal chance" and that "a successful result was obtained in the search challenge production". Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to a small hit. After that, the small hit game is executed.

58 and 59 are diagrams showing a first effect example when the search challenge icon is not displayed.
The first production example is an production example in which the search challenge icon is exceptionally not displayed even in a scene where the search challenge icon is displayed.

[Before the start of variable display production]
In FIG. 58 (A): In the 7-segment display device 200, the 7-segment effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a detached mode (“3”-“4”-“5”). Further, on the liquid crystal display 42, the effect symbol Hz is stopped and displayed in an out-of-order manner ("3"-"4"-"5"). Further, in the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the normal effect symbol Fz is stopped and displayed in an out-of-order manner (a mode indicating that the hit symbol 2 does not correspond to the hit symbol 2).

[Start of variable display production]
FIG. 58 (B): With the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is started, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is scrolled to change the display. The production starts.

At the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the normal effect symbol Fz is stopped and displayed in a winning mode (a mode indicating that it corresponds to the winning symbol 2).

[Animal chance production]
Further, in the illustrated example, an effect in which an animal character appears from the upper left position of the screen is executed. This effect is executed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the hit symbol 2 in the normal symbol display device 33. In this case, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time (opened for 6.0 seconds) even though it is in the non-time shortened state.

In FIG. 58 (C): The animal chance production is continuing, and the production in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance right-handed" is being executed. In the illustrated example, the variable start winning device 28 is operating and the game ball is flowing down toward the variable starting winning device 28.

In FIG. 59 (D): The animal chance production is continuing, and the production in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance right-handed" is being executed. In the illustrated example, a game ball has entered the variable start winning device 28 during operation.

[Stop the left effect design]
In FIG. 59 (E): The effect symbol representing the number "6" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the number is used as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol representing "6" is stopped.

Further, when the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the memory of the second special symbol is increased by one, so that one LED of the second special symbol storage display area M2 is lit.

[Hiding the search challenge icon]
Originally, the search challenge icon IC is displayed at this timing, but the search challenge icon IC is not displayed here. The reason for this is that the number of special fluctuations remains (because the number of special fluctuations is a value larger than 0).

[Stop right production design]
In FIG. 59 (F): Next, the effect symbol representing the number "5" as the 7-segment effect symbol on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200 is stopped, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is on the right. As a result, the production symbol representing the number "5" has stopped.

After that, the change of the first special symbol ends, and then the change of the second special symbol starts. However, if the result of the second special symbol lottery is out of order and the number of special fluctuations remains, the fluctuation of the second special symbol becomes a short variation. Therefore, in such a case, not only the search challenge icon is not displayed, but also the search challenge effect is not executed.

60 to 62 are diagrams showing an example of the second effect when the search challenge icon is not displayed.
The second production example is a production example in which the search challenge icon is not displayed, but a special icon (super heat icon) is displayed instead.

[Before the start of variable display production]
In FIG. 60 (A): In the 7-segment display device 200, the 7-segment effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a detached mode (“6”-“7”-“8”). Further, on the liquid crystal display 42, the effect symbol Hz is stopped and displayed in an out-of-order manner ("6"-"7"-"8"). Further, in the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the normal effect symbol Fz is stopped and displayed in an out-of-order manner (a mode indicating that the hit symbol 2 does not correspond to the hit symbol 2).

Further, in the storage display device 300, since two LEDs in the first special symbol storage display area M1 are lit, it indicates that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is two, and the second special symbol storage display. Since all the LEDs in the area M2 are turned off, it indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 60 (B): When the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to fluctuate, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates to display the variation. The production starts. Since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of LEDs in the first special symbol storage display area M1 decreases from two to one in conjunction with the decrease. As for the fluctuation of the first special symbol here, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern that is out of alignment is selected.

At the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the normal effect symbol Fz is stopped and displayed in a winning mode (a mode indicating that it corresponds to the winning symbol 2).

[Animal chance production]
Further, in the illustrated example, an effect in which an animal character appears from the upper left position of the screen is executed. This effect is executed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the hit symbol 2 in the normal symbol display device 33. In this case, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time (opened for 6.0 seconds) even though it is in the non-time shortened state.

In FIG. 60 (C): The animal chance production is continuing, and the production in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance right-handed" is being executed. In the illustrated example, the variable start winning device 28 is operating and the game ball is flowing down toward the variable starting winning device 28.

In FIG. 61 (D): The animal chance production is continuing, and the production in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance right-handed" is being executed. In the illustrated example, a game ball has entered the variable start winning device 28 during operation.

[Stop the left effect design]
In FIG. 61 (E): The effect symbol representing the number "6" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the number is used as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol representing "6" is stopped.

Further, when the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the memory of the second special symbol is increased by one, so that one LED of the second special symbol storage display area M2 is lit.

[Hiding the search challenge icon]
Originally, the search challenge icon IC is displayed at this timing, but the search challenge icon IC is not displayed here. Instead, the special icon IC2 (super heat icon) is displayed here. The reason for this is that the memory of the big hit exists in the memory (holding) of the first special symbol.

[Stop right production design]
In FIG. 61 (F): Next, the effect symbol representing the number “4” is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is on the right. As a result, the production symbol representing the number "4" has stopped.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 62 (G): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. When the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of non-winning (missing), the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is also produced by the liquid crystal display 42. Similarly, the symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) manner. In the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number "9" is stopped as the central 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200, and the number "9" is used as the medium effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol representing "is stopped.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 62 (H): When the control of winning order digestion is adopted, the first special symbol changes first. Then, with the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is started, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is scrolled to start the variation display effect. Since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of LEDs in the first special symbol storage display area M1 decreases from one to zero in conjunction with the decrease. As for the fluctuation of the second special symbol here, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the big hit is selected. Further, in the illustrated example, the production in which the animal character utters the line "super heat" is executed.

In FIG. 62 (I): Then, after that, the reach effect is executed, and the effect that becomes a big hit is executed. If there is a big hit in the memory of the first special symbol, even if the search challenge icon IC is displayed when the memory of the second special symbol increases, the big hit game is executed before that, so the search challenge icon IC is used. It is not done, and if the time is shortened after that, the search challenge effect may not be executed. Therefore, in such a case, the special icon IC2 is displayed instead of the search challenge icon IC.

[Direction during a major role]
63 and 64 are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of a big role playing effect performed during a big hit game. It should be noted that the following large-scale production is an production performed on the liquid crystal display 42.

[Start of big hit game]
In FIG. 63 (A): When the big hit game is started, for example, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the screen, and a production image (for example, a female character) peculiar to the big hit game is displayed. ..

["Right-handed" display during major roles]
Further, in the present embodiment, since the first variable winning device 30 is arranged in the right side portion in the game area 8a, the right side portion in the game area 8a is designated as the launch position (launch direction) of the game ball during the big role. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the above-mentioned firing position designation display lamp 38f is lit and displayed under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the firing position designation command indicating “right-handed” is transmitted to the effect control device 124. In response to this, guidance information (arrow indicating the right direction, characters of "right-handed", etc.) prompting "right-handed" is displayed in the display screen on the effect control by the effect control CPU 126).

[1st round]
In FIG. 63 (B): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, three circles are displayed along with the character information of "BIG BONUS" in the upper left part of the screen. Then, the ○ mark located on the far left is displayed in red (hatching of diagonal lines), and the remaining two ○ marks are displayed in white. As a result, you can get a ball in 3 rounds, the current round is the 1st round of the 3 rounds, and a circle is marked every time one round in which you can get a ball is advanced. It is possible to teach the player that it is displayed in red.

Here, the number of "○" marks increases according to the winning symbols. For example, when the winning symbol is the "first winning symbol" or the "second winning symbol", the number of "○" is "3", but the winning symbol is the "third winning symbol". In this case, the number of "○" is "2". If the winning symbol is the "4th winning symbol", the number of "○ marks" is "9", and if the winning symbol is the "5th winning symbol", the number of "○ marks" is "○". The number of "6" is "6", and when the winning symbol is the "sixth winning symbol", the number of "○" is "3".

[3rd round]
In FIG. 63 (C): After that, the jackpot game progresses smoothly, and for example, when the game shifts to the third round, for example, all three circles are displayed in red. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that all the rounds in which the ball can be obtained in the third round are completed.

[Time reduction state rush production]
In FIG. 64 (D): Then, the effect of displaying the character information such as "Enter drive mode!" Is executed by using the end time (ending time) of the big hit game. This makes it possible to teach the player that the "drive mode" is about to start. In addition, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the game proceeds by hitting right even in the "drive mode".

Here, during the ending production, a notification is given to remind the user of forgetting to take the prepaid card, such as "Be careful not to forget to take the prepaid card", or to prevent the game from being absorbed into the game, such as "Be careful about being absorbed in the game". The notification may be executed.

[End of big hit game, time shortened state]
In FIG. 64 (E): When the jackpot game is completed and the internal state (game state) is set to the time shortened state, the stay mode is set to the "drive mode", and the background image is the car on which the female rides. It will be changed to an image that expresses the state of traveling on the ground. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the current internal state (game state) is a time shortened state different from the normal state.

[Time saving and medium production]
In this way, when the game is proceeding in the time shortened state, the time saving medium effect (advantageous game state effect) for displaying the background image corresponding to the time shortened state (advantageous game state) is executed.

[Right-handed suggestion production]
Further, at the upper part of the screen, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed. In the right-handed suggestion effect, right-handed character information and a right-pointing arrow symbol are displayed on the upper left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. It should be noted that such a right-handed suggestion effect may be continuously executed when the gaming state is in the time shortened state, or may be executed only at the start of the time shortened state. Then, by executing such an effect, it is possible to urge the player to "hit right".

[Remaining number display effect]
Further, in the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the remaining number of times display effect is executed. In the remaining number display effect, a rectangular area is provided at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the remaining number of times that the game can be advanced in the drive mode is displayed in the rectangular area. In the illustrated example, the information of "remaining 10 times" is displayed. The remaining number of times is decremented by 1 each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortened state, and is decremented by 1 each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the non-time shortened state. Therefore, the remaining number of times is not subtracted even if the first special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortened state or the non-time shortened state.

[Example of drive mode (time reduction state)]
65 to 67 are continuous views showing an example of a drive mode effect.

In FIG. 65 (A): In the drive mode, the background image is changed to an image representing a state in which a car in which a female rides is traveling on the ground. The combination of the 7-segment effect symbols displayed on the 7-segment display device 200 is the winning item of "7"-"7"-"7", and the combination of the effect symbols Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is "7"-"7". "-" 7 "is the winning prize. This shows the outcome at the time of winning. Further, at the upper part of the screen, the right-handed suggestion effect is executed, and such a right-handed suggestion effect is continuously executed when the game state is the time shortened state.

[Start of change of special symbol]
In FIG. 65 (B): At the time of the first hit with the first special symbol, the memory of the first special symbol is often stored, and the memory of the second special symbol is generally not stored. In the illustrated example, one memory of the first special symbol is stored (one LED of the first special symbol storage display area M1 is lit). Therefore, when the drive mode is entered in such a situation, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the memory of the first special symbol is not accumulated, the player executes a right-handed strike to first execute the change of the second special symbol. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to change, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z1 also change. To start. Here, in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol, it is assumed that it corresponds to the loss.

[End of change of 1st special symbol]
In FIG. 65 (C): When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a detached manner, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. Z1 is also displayed as a stop in the form of being off. During this time, it is assumed that the player executes a right-handed hit, a plurality of game balls pass through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and four game balls enter the right start winning opening 28b. .. In this case, four memories of the second special symbol are stored (all four LEDs in the second special symbol display area M2 are lit).

Here, since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is not subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times remains 10 times.

In FIG. 66 (D): Since the memory of the second special symbol is digested with priority over the memory of the first special symbol, the internal lottery is next executed using the memory of the second special symbol. Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to change accordingly, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 also change. To start. Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol.

[Start small hit, open second prize opening]
In FIG. 66 (E): Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 (combination of "5"-"2"-"6"). , The effect symbol Hz (combination of "5"-"2"-"6" of the liquid crystal display 42) and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit. .. As a result, the small hit game is started, and the second big winning opening 31b is opened. Then, the effect that the car on which the female character is riding speeds up and moves to the right side of the screen is executed.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is the remaining 9 times.

In FIG. 66 (F): When the small hit game is started, a production in which the hermit character utters the line "Aim at the attacker in the lower right" is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player that the game ball must be entered into the second variable winning device 31.

[Passing through a specific area]
In FIG. 67 (G): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to the small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is the sixth winning symbol. do. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and emits a line such as "I did it! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End of small hit, start of big hit game]
In FIG. 67 (H): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is.

After that, the process proceeds to (B) in FIG. 63, and the same production during the big hit game as described above is started, and the big hit game progresses. For example, if the winning symbol at the time of a small hit regarding the second special symbol corresponds to the sixth winning symbol, it is possible to substantially obtain three rounds of balls. In addition, when the big hit game is executed in the drive mode, the big role middle effect dedicated to the winning in the drive mode may be executed.

68 and 69 are continuous views showing an example of effect when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Such a situation occurs mainly when the memory of the second special symbol is accumulated, although it is different in the final fluctuation of the time shortened state.

Here, it is assumed that four memories of the second special symbol exist before the change of the second special symbol starts. For this reason, the time-saving and medium-time production is continuously executed. Further, as the remaining number of times display effect, the information of "remaining 4 times" is displayed. However, the right-handed suggestion effect has not been executed.

[During display of fluctuations in special symbols]
In FIG. 68 (A): When the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to change accordingly, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The fluctuation of the effect symbol Hz of the vessel 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 is also started. Since the situation here is not a time-reduced state, the probability of hitting symbol 2 in the normal symbol lottery is low even if the starting gate 20 is passed. Therefore, it is difficult for the variable start winning device 28 to shift to the open state, and basically it is not possible to store the memory of the second special symbol. Therefore, the drive mode in such a non-time shortened state becomes a chance zone in which the second special symbol fluctuates up to four times.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 68 (B): Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the 7-segment effect symbol (combination of "2"-"2"-"3") of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. The symbol Hz (combination of "2"-"2"-"3") and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit. In this case, the effect that the animal character raises the "mark on which the number 7 is displayed" is executed.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is the remaining three times.

[Start small hit, open second prize opening]
In FIG. 68 (C): Then, when the small hit game is started, the second big winning opening 31b is opened, and the car on which the female character is riding speeds up and moves to the right side of the screen. Will be executed. At this time, an effect of leaving the animal character behind is executed.

[Passing through a specific area]
In FIG. 69 (D): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to the small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is the fourth winning symbol. do. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and emits a line such as "I did it! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End of small hit, start of big hit game]
In FIG. 69 (E): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is. After that, the process proceeds to (B) in FIG. 63, and the same production during the big hit game as described above is started, and the big hit game progresses.

70 to 72 are continuous views showing an example of effect when shifting from the drive mode in the non-time reduction state to the normal mode in the non-time reduction state.
Such a situation occurs mainly in the case where the final fluctuation in the time shortened state is out of alignment, the memory of the second special symbol is accumulated, and the memory of the second special symbol is all out of alignment.

Here, it is assumed that four memories of the second special symbol exist before the change of the second special symbol starts. For this reason, the time-saving and medium-time production is continuously executed. Further, as the remaining number of times display effect, the information of "remaining 4 times" is displayed. However, the right-handed suggestion effect has not been executed.

[During display of fluctuations in special symbols]
In FIG. 70 (A): When the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to change accordingly, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The fluctuation of the effect symbol Hz of the vessel 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 is also started. When shifting from the time shortened state to the non-time shortened state, the first variation of the second special symbol is a short variation due to a special variation pattern (a variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second).

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 70 (B): Here, it is assumed that the internal lottery for the second special symbol corresponds to a loss. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a detached manner, the 7-segment effect symbol (combination of "1"-"2"-"3") of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. The Hz (combination of "1"-"2"-"3") and the fourth symbol Z2 of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a disengaged manner. Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is the remaining three times.

[During display of fluctuations in special symbols]
In FIG. 70 (C): When the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to change accordingly, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The fluctuation of the effect symbol Hz of the vessel 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 is also started. When shifting from the time shortened state to the non-time shortened state, the second variation of the second special symbol becomes a short variation due to a special variation pattern (a variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second).

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 71 (D): Here, it is assumed that the internal lottery relating to the second special symbol corresponds to a loss. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a detached manner, the 7-segment effect symbol (combination of "2"-"4"-"6" of the 7-segment display device 200) and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. The Hz (combination of "2"-"4"-"6") and the fourth symbol Z2 of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in an out-of-order manner. Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is the remaining two times.

[During display of fluctuations in special symbols]
In FIG. 71 (E): When the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to change accordingly, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The fluctuation of the effect symbol Hz of the vessel 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 is also started. When shifting from the time shortened state to the non-time shortened state, the third variation of the second special symbol becomes a short variation due to a special variation pattern (a variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second).

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 71 (F): Here, it is assumed that the internal lottery for the second special symbol corresponds to a loss. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a detached manner, the 7-segment effect symbol (combination of "3"-"5"-"8") of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. The Hz (combination of "3"-"5"-"8") and the fourth symbol Z2 of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a disengaged manner. Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is the remaining one time.

[During display of fluctuations in special symbols]
In FIG. 72 (G): When the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to change accordingly, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The fluctuation of the effect symbol Hz of the vessel 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 is also started. When shifting from the time shortened state to the non-time shortened state, the fourth variation of the second special symbol becomes a short variation due to a special variation pattern (a variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second).

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 72 (H): Here, it is assumed that the internal lottery relating to the second special symbol corresponds to a loss. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a detached manner, the 7-segment effect symbol (combination of "4"-"5"-"6") of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. The Hz (combination of "4"-"5"-"6") and the fourth symbol Z2 of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in an out-of-order manner. Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is 0 times remaining. When the fourth variation of the second special symbol is completed, the drive mode in the non-time shortened state is terminated.

In FIG. 72 (I): Then, when the first special symbol fluctuates due to the player hitting the left side, the variable display effect in the normal mode is executed.

When the memory (hold) of the second special symbol is stored to the maximum in the final change of the time shortened state, it becomes such an production example, but the memory of the second special symbol is maximized in the final change of the time shortened state. If you do not save up to, the mode will shift to the normal mode with the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol remaining.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the above effect will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach advance notice effect, major role effect, effect using liquid crystal display 42, 7-segment display device 200, and storage display device 300, time saving medium effect, right-handed suggestion effect, remaining number of times. The display effects and the like are all controlled through the following control processes.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium other effect processing (step S402a), and 7-segment display device. Effect management process (step S403), normal symbol effect management process (step S403a), second special symbol winning process (step S403b), display output process (step S404), lamp drive process (step S406), acoustic drive process (step S406). The configuration includes a group of subroutines for step S408), the effect random number update process (step S410), and other processes (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special symbol destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory number increase effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory number decrease effect command, and a start command. Mouth winning sound control command, demo production command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, status specification command, round number command, launch position specification command, error notification command, jackpot There are end effect command, fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, count cut counter command, various error commands, variable start winning device long open start command, special fluctuation count specification command, etc.

Step S401: In the working memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the effect using the storage display device 300. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, and the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable. It controls the content of the effect when the winning device 31 is opened and closed. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern for various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). As described above, in the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 displays the effect content on the liquid crystal display 42 (effect symbol Hz, fourth symbol Z1, Z2, effect content related to the important role effect, etc., content of various notice effects). Executes the process of determining. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S402a: The effect control CPU 126 executes other effect processes such as time reduction, pseudo time reduction, and so on. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the effect content related to the right-handed suggestion effect, the remaining number of times display effect, and the like. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S403: In the 7-segment display device effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of controlling the 7-segment display device 200 based on the effect content determined in the effect symbol management process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the effect content (contents related to the 7-segment effect symbol) to be displayed on the 7-segment display device 200. It is preferable that the effect symbol Hz and the 7-segment effect symbol basically perform the same operation, but different operations may be performed. When different operations are performed, for example, the timing at which the effect symbol Hz and the 7-segment effect symbol stop may be different, or the stop symbols may be different.

Step S403a: In the normal symbol effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect (animal chance effect) when a chance state for the second special symbol occurs. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing the animal chance effect between the time when the variable start prize device long open start command is received and the time when the variable start prize device 28 is closed. do.

Further, when the normal symbol fluctuates in the non-time shortened state, the effect control CPU 126 executes a variation display effect of the normal effect symbol Fz (simple deviation variation, reach variation, etc.), and the result of the normal symbol lottery becomes the winning symbol 1. If applicable, the effect of stopping the normal effect symbol Fz in an out-of-order manner (random eyes) is executed, and if the result of the ordinary symbol lottery corresponds to the winning symbol 2, the normal effect symbol Fz is executed. Is executed in a hit mode (a mode in which three circle figures are aligned). The effect using the normal effect symbol Fz may be always executed in a non-time shortened state, or may be executed only in a certain case.

Step S403b: In the second special symbol winning process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of controlling the effect when the game ball wins the starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 asks the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) for basic control information of the effect content (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , Working memory effect pattern number, look-ahead notice effect pattern number, variation effect pattern number, change notice effect number, background pattern number, etc.) are instructed. As a result, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146 and VDP152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect execution means).

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp drive circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp drive circuit 132 drives various lamps 46 to 52, a board lamp 53, and the like (on / off, blinking, change in luminance gradation, etc.) based on the control signal.

Step S408: In the next acoustic drive process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs the effect content (for example, BGM during variable display effect, reach effect, mode transition effect, jackpot effect, etc.) to the acoustic drive circuit 134. Instruct. As a result, the speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sounds according to the content of the effect.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processes, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the drive IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates by using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above-mentioned effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect content in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the effect symbol management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described according to a procedure example.

Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect control CPU 126 has received the effect command when the number of working memories increases. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S702. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of lighting one LED of the first special symbol storage display area M1 or the LED of the second special symbol storage display area M2. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 may determine the effect pattern and effect scenario of the color change effect (for example, the display color of the LED in the storage display area X1 and the display color of the LED in the effect display area X2). can.

Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect control CPU 126 has received the operation memory number reduction effect command. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is saved. When it is confirmed that the effect command for reducing the number of working memories is saved (step S704: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for reducing the number of working memories is saved (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of turning off one LED of the first special symbol storage display area M1 or one LED of the second special symbol storage display area M2 corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery. , Select an effect of lighting the LED of the storage display area X1. The LED in the storage display area X1 is selected to be turned off when the change of the special symbol is completed. Further, when the LED of the effect display area X2 is turned on, the effect of turning off the LED of the effect display area X2 when the change of the special symbol is completed is selected.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S502 to step S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change preprocessing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process has been completed, the next step. Select the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) as the jump destination of. Further, the variable winning device operation process (step S508) is selected as the jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 23) is selected in the main control CPU 72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol change pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type (type of winning symbol), variation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern (reach) for the advance notice effect. Pre-occurrence advance notice pattern, post-occurrence advance notice pattern, etc.) can be selected. In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls the demo effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing processing, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructed to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as needed. For example, when an effect using the push button 45a or the lever member 45b is performed during the execution of the variable display effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and the effect content according to the result ( The control information of the button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) actually ends the variable display effect that has been executed up to that point in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effective manner (design effect execution). means).

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect content during the small hit game or the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the big role effect according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned effect symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called waiting state for customers.
In addition, in the effect indicating the waiting state for customers, a content for preventing the devotion to the game such as "Be careful about the devotion to the game" may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily perform the effect of preventing the player from getting stuck at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the content of the demo effect based on the demo effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 73) and the lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 73). do.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the out-of-order normal variation or the out-of-reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the change this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the fluctuation pattern command of this time corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot fluctuation. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes the small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can refer to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and select the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. can. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the change schedule (variation time) and stop of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time. Determine the display mode and the like.

For example, the effect control CPU 126 changes the effect symbol Hz, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 in the "drive mode" state when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the time shortened state, and finally the effect is small. A process of selecting an effect pattern for stopping and displaying the effect symbol Hz, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to the hit is executed.

On the other hand, when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the non-time shortened state, the effect control CPU 126 has, for example, the effect symbol Hz, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the fourth in the state where the "drive mode" is continued or the normal mode. The process of varying the symbol Z2 and finally selecting the effect symbol Hz corresponding to the small hit, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the effect pattern for stopping and displaying the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is out of alignment in step S604 (Yes), it then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of loss are classified into "out-of-time normal variation", "time-shortening out-of-time variation", "out-of-reach variation", and the like, and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "out-of-reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control CPU 126 selects is determined based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of off is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time (variation time and reach). The presence or absence of occurrence, the reach type and reach occurrence timing in the case of reach occurrence), and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.) are determined. It should be noted that the method of determining the effect at the time of such a loss is the same at the time of a big hit.

When determining the variable effect pattern at the time of a small hit, a large hit, or a miss, it is also possible to determine the effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (pseudo-ream).

In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern related to the search challenge effect. For example, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern for a search challenge effect when the second special symbol fluctuates in a non-time shortened state, and selects an effect pattern for finding an animal when it corresponds to a small hit or a big hit. However, if it corresponds to the outlier, select an effect pattern in which the animal cannot be found. In addition, the search challenge effect should not be executed when the fluctuation of the second special symbol becomes a short fluctuation due to the remaining number of special fluctuations (the number of special fluctuations is a value larger than 0). You can also.

When any of the processes of step S608, step S610, and step S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, time shortened state). As described above, the advance notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or to notify the player that there is a possibility of a big hit or a small hit in the end. .. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set higher at the time of winning in order to raise the expectation of the player.

Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes the mode effect management process (advantageous game state effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, in principle, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the normal mode when the internal state is the non-time shortened state, and when the internal state is the time shortened state, the effect control CPU 126 executes the process. The process of selecting the background image corresponding to the drive mode (the process of selecting the time-saving and medium-duty effect) is executed.

However, as an exception, the effect control CPU 126 has a case where the memory of the second special symbol exists when the time-reduced state is changed to the non-time-reduced state even when the internal state is the non-time-reduced state. Select the background image corresponding to the drive mode (advantageous gaming state effect executing means, advantageous gaming state effect continuous executing means). It should be noted that such an exceptional process is executed in the process of displaying the effect symbol stop, which will be described later.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol changing process (step S504 in FIG. 75), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (symbol effect execution means). The advance notice effect is executed based on various advance notice effect patterns. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here.

[Processing during display of production symbol stop]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process during display of the effect symbol stop display. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S650: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is during the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state specification command. The internal state can also be confirmed by using the fluctuation pattern command (hereinafter, the same applies).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S652, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control CPU 126 is in the step. Execute S656.

Step S652: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the time reduction is the final variation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can access the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and check the number-of-count counter command to check whether or not the time reduction is the final fluctuation. For example, if the first count cut counter value or the second count cut counter value is a fluctuation when switching from "1" to "0", the effect control CPU 126 can determine that it is a time saving final fluctuation.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the time reduction final variation is performed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S654, and when it cannot be confirmed that the time reduction final variation is performed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666. ..

Step S654: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the storage number of the second special symbol in the pseudo time saving counter. The pseudo time saving counter is stored in the RAM 130. For example, when the storage number of the second special symbol is "0", "0" is set in the pseudo time saving counter and the storage number of the second special symbol is "1". , "1" is set in the pseudo time saving counter, and "4" is set in the pseudo time saving counter when the storage number of the second special symbol is "4".
When this process is completed, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666.

Step S656: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the stay background is a normal background, that is, whether or not the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is a background image corresponding to the normal mode.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666, and when it cannot be confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (No), the effect control CPU 126 is stepped. Execute S658.

Step S658: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S660, and the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0. If it cannot be confirmed (No), that is, if the value of the pseudo time saving counter is 0, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S664.

Step S660: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background as a pseudo time-saving background. The pseudo time saving background is the background of the drive mode in which the right-handed display is not displayed.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 of the effect control CPU 126 is a pseudo time saving counter even when the time shortening state (advantageous gaming state) ends and the non-time shortening state (predetermined gaming state) is entered. When the value is larger than 0 (when a special condition is satisfied), the time-saving and medium-time effect (advantageous game state effect) can be continuously executed (advantageous game state effect continuous execution means). ..

Step S662: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo time reduction counter.

Step S664: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background as the normal background. The normal background is the background of the normal mode.

Step S666: The effect control CPU 126 executes other processing. In other processing, as described above, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect according to the result of the internal lottery.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 75).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process when the variable winning device is operated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the result of this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the lottery result command, and confirms whether it corresponds to a big hit or a small hit. As a result of this confirmation, if the result of this fluctuation is a big hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S802. On the other hand, if the result of this variation is not a big hit (No), that is, if it is a small hit, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S804.

Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process when the jackpot variable winning device is activated. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores various image data related to the effect pattern at the time of a big hit stored in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP152) in advance as a large role effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. The process of reading according to the winning symbol is executed.

Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit variable winning device operation time process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern (for example, an effect in which a car on which a female character is riding speeds up) indicating that the small hit game has started at the start of the small hit game, and suggests a right-handed strike. If the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the effect pattern when passing through the specific area (a heart mark with the letter V drawn by the female character in the car) is displayed. Execute the process of selecting the effect to be raised).

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 75).

[Time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium Other production processing]
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the time saving medium, the pseudo time saving medium, and other effect processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Here, the time reduction medium (time reduction) is a time reduction state, and the pseudo time reduction medium (pseudo time reduction) is a state in which the background image during the time reduction is displayed in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction state). Drive mode).

Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is during the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state specification command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S852 and step S854, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control is performed. The CPU 126 executes step S856.

Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 executes the remaining number of times display process based on the remaining number of time reductions. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the count cut counter command, and selects an effect pattern that displays the value obtained by adding "4" to the second count cut counter value as the remaining number of times. Execute the process to be performed. As a result, during the time reduction, the value of "remaining 10 times to remaining 5 times" or "remaining 100 times to remaining 5 times" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes the right-handed suggestion effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the right-handed suggestion effect at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S855: The effect control CPU 126 executes the right-handed emphasis effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 displays a liquid crystal display when it becomes necessary to execute a right-handed emphasis effect, for example, when the player continues to left-handed even though the time has been shortened. At the upper part of the screen of the vessel 42, a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the effect of emphasizing right-handed striking is executed.

Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction. When the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is larger than 0, the effect control CPU 126 can determine that the pseudo time reduction is in progress.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S858, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (No), the effect control CPU 126 is executed. Returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes the remaining number of times display process based on the pseudo time reduction counter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern that displays the value of the pseudo time reduction counter as the remaining number of times. As a result, during the pseudo time reduction, the value of "remaining 4 times to remaining 1 time (last)" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number of times display effect.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

[Processing at the time of winning the second special symbol]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol winning process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S880: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a normal normal symbol has been won. A normal normal symbol winning is a case where the normal symbol lottery corresponds to "winning symbol 2". As a result, the case corresponding to "winning symbol 1" in the ordinary symbol lottery is excluded.

The reason for excluding the case corresponding to "hit symbol 1" is that when it corresponds to "hit symbol 1", the variable start winning device 28 is not long open but short open, so the second special at that time. Although there is a possibility that the memory of the symbol can be stored, such a game method is not a normal game method. For this reason, various icons are not displayed when the game method is not normal.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the normal symbol is won normally (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S881. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the normal symbol has been won (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

Step S881: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the gaming state is a non-time shortened state. The game status can be confirmed by a status specification command or the like.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming state is the non-time shortened state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S882. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the gaming state is the non-time shortened state (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

Step S882: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the game state is other than during the big hit (for example, during fluctuation, stop display, customer waiting state, etc.). Whether or not it is a big hit can be confirmed by various commands (round number command, launch position specification command, etc.).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming state is other than during the big hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S883. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the game state is other than during the big hit (No), that is, when the game state is during the big hit, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

Step S883: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is “0”. The number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol can be confirmed by the command for specifying the number of special fluctuations.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is "0" (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S884. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is "0" (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 has a second special symbol in the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state) when the condition (predetermined condition) for not executing the search challenge icon display effect is satisfied. Even if the lottery opportunity (second lottery opportunity) occurs, it is possible not to execute the search challenge icon display effect (specific effect) (control means).
That is, in the search challenge icon display effect (specific effect), if the condition (predetermined condition) for not executing the search challenge icon display effect is satisfied, the lottery of the second special symbol is performed in the non-time reduction state (predetermined game state). Even if an opportunity (second lottery opportunity) occurs, it is not executed.

The predetermined condition is that a special fluctuation pattern (short fluctuation, short fluctuation) different from the predetermined fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation, long fluctuation) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol (second symbol). be.

Step S884: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not there is a win in the memory of the first special symbol. The memory of the first special symbol can be confirmed by the fluctuation pattern destination determination command. The object to be confirmed may include not only the memory of the first special symbol but also the changing first special symbol.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no winning in the memory of the first special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S885. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the memory of the first special symbol has not been won (No), that is, when the memory of the first special symbol has been won, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S886.

Step S885: The effect control CPU 126 executes the search challenge icon display effect pattern selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying the search challenge icon IC on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 performs a search challenge icon display effect (specific effect) based on the lottery opportunity (second lottery opportunity) of the second special symbol in the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state). ) Can be executed (specific production execution means).

Step S886: The effect control CPU 126 executes the special icon display effect pattern selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying the special icon IC 2 on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, in the non-time reduction state (predetermined game state), basically, the search challenge icon display effect (specific effect) based on the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol is executed. Depending on the situation, the search challenge icon display effect is not executed, so it is possible to prevent the search challenge icon display effect from being executed in situations where the search challenge icon display effect causes a sense of discomfort, reducing the discomfort in the effect. be able to.

(2) According to the present embodiment, as the condition (predetermined condition) for not executing the search challenge icon display effect, a special variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Since it is a condition, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the originally intended production cannot be executed due to the setting of a special fluctuation pattern, and as a result, the discomfort in the production is reduced. be able to.

(3) According to the present embodiment, when the value of the number of special fluctuations is larger than 0 (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the fluctuation time during which the search challenge icon display effect (specific effect) cannot be executed. Since it is possible to select a fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern that becomes a short fluctuation of about several seconds), it is possible to avoid the search challenge icon display effect being executed in an unintended situation by selecting the fluctuation pattern. Can be done.

(4) In the present embodiment, one task is to solve the inconsistency when executing the chance effect targeting the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the non-time shortened state (normal time, left-handed state). ing.
The preconditions of this embodiment are as follows, for example.
The gaming machine of the present embodiment is a type 1 type 2 mixing machine, and the game ball can enter the start device left start winning opening 454 in a non-time shortened state. The start device left start winning opening 454 is a winning opening for opening the variable start winning device 28 arranged in the right-handed region. When the game ball wins the variable start winning device 28, the search challenge icon display effect (specific effect) is executed, and the variable effect (search challenge effect) for a predetermined time is executed. Then, when displaying the search challenge icon, a restriction is applied so that the search challenge icon is not displayed in a situation where inconsistency occurs.

(Case 1)
In the state where the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol remains (when the memory is not stored to the maximum in the final fluctuation of the time shortened state), the shortened fluctuation (short fluctuation) is selected in the fluctuation of the second special symbol. (For example, fluctuation for 1 second).
In the state where the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol does not remain (when the memory is accumulated to the maximum in the final fluctuation in the time shortened state), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is a long fluctuation (long fluctuation, search challenge fluctuation). Is selected (eg, fluctuates for 10 seconds).

Then, in such a specification, when the winning symbol 2 is hit in the normal symbol lottery in the non-time shortened state, the right-handed hit is suggested on the LCD screen and the variable start winning device 28 is urged to enter the game ball. Above, if the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol remains, the search challenge icon is prevented from appearing.

(Case 2)
When the winning symbol 2 corresponds to the normal symbol lottery in the non-time shortened state and the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, basically, the search challenge icon appears. Here, if there is a memory that becomes a big hit in the memory of the first special symbol, if the control of winning order digestion is adopted, the big hit game of the first special symbol is executed first, and the game state is shortened. When moving to, the exploration challenge itself may not be executed. Also, if the search challenge icon appears in this situation, it may be considered that the search challenge icon remains even after the big hit game. Therefore, when the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the content (holding information) of the memory of the first special symbol is checked, and if the jackpot fluctuation is included, the search challenge icon IC is used instead. The special icon IC2 is made to appear in.

Then, by executing such control, it is possible to reduce the appearance of discomfort.

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of the effect given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of the above-mentioned effect.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, but the present invention may be applied to a so-called type 1 gaming machine (a gaming machine not provided with a specific area).
The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having a probability fluctuation function, and in this case, it can also be applied to a so-called loop type gaming machine (a type in which a substantially upper limit is not set for the number of probability variations). It can also be applied to ST type (a type that sets a substantial upper limit on the number of probability changes) gaming machines.
Further, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation region, or can be applied to a gaming machine having no probability variation region.
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that does not adopt "simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol", and can also be applied to a gaming machine that adopts simultaneous rotation. ..

In the above-described embodiment, the example of the gaming machine provided with the 7-segment display device 200 has been described, but the gaming machine may not be provided with the 7-segment display device 200.
Further, the 7-segment display device 200 may be changed to a drum unit (for example, a device having three rows of reels) or a liquid crystal display.

The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine with settings.
The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine equipped with a performance display monitor.

If there is a hold of the remaining second special symbol (remaining hold after the time reduction is lost) when the time reduction state is changed to the non-time reduction state (when the predetermined condition is not satisfied), the specific effect is executed. When there is a hold of the second special symbol generated in the non-time shortened state (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being executed. "The specific effect is not executed" means that the second special symbol lottery is performed even though the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (second lottery opportunity) has occurred in the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state). It is assumed that the lottery opportunity has not occurred, and the accumulation of the hold of the second special symbol and the change of the second special symbol are not executed, and as a result, the specific effect is not executed.

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately deformed.

FIG. 81 is a front view of the pachinko machine of another embodiment. Further, FIG. 82 is a rear view of the pachinko machine of another embodiment. In the following description, basically, the same description as that of the above-described embodiment is omitted, but there are some parts that are duplicated. Further, with respect to the reference numerals in the drawings, there are parts having the same reference numerals as those in the above-described embodiment and parts having different reference numerals. The major difference between the above-described embodiment and the other embodiment is that the decorative unit is attached to the front upper part of the pachinko machine of the other embodiment. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine of another embodiment will be described.

The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

Here, in the present specification, the left side is the left side when viewed from the player who is seated facing the pachinko machine 1, the right side is the right side when viewed from the player, and the upper side is the top side when viewed from the player. The explanation is that the lower side is the bottom when viewed from the person, the front side is the front side when viewed from the player, and the back side is the rear side when viewed from the player.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side of the player when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 has fasteners such as screws for island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the upper and lower short sides, and metal is used for the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. With the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 closed to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof makes it impossible to open the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 together with the locking tool. ..

Further, a cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the game hall inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes a game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (a game area on which the game ball flows down, a board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

[Composition of ball plate]
The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 toward the front surface as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the saucer unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower plate 6b or lower plate) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It will be paid out in 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) worth of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. In the present embodiment, the example of the model connected to the card unit is described, but the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the card unit).

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can, for example, push the upper plate ball removal button 6d to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can push the lower plate ball removing lever 6e backward to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the handle unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration in the game area 8a will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower side of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right lighting unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the upper position of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, light emission (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.) of the built-in LED. Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right lighting unit 49 each incorporate a speaker 54 on a glass frame, and the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 each have a speaker 55 in a glass frame. Is built in. On the other hand, the inner frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower right position of the inner frame assembly 7 (the upper left position of the handle unit 16 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1), and the outer frame speaker is in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. 58 is incorporated. These speakers 54, 55, 56, 58 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (general sound) to execute the effect.

[Operating member]
Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an operation unit 60 is installed so as to project upward from the upper plate 6b on the front surface side (operation means). The operation unit 60 has a large push button 64 in the center thereof, and a handle lever 62 on the left side of the push button 64. The operation unit 60 can accept operations in various situations shown in the production. In one scene of the production, the handle lever 62 is pulled toward the front side by the player, and in another scene, the push button 64 is pushed in. By operating the operation unit 60 in various modes, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbol is changing, the jackpot is confirmed, or the jackpot is hit. It is possible to generate some kind of effect (notice effect, probable change promotion effect, promotion effect during a major role, etc.) during the game.

Further, around the push button 64, a ring-shaped portion 65 is installed so as to surround the push button 64. Unlike the handle lever 62 and the push button 64, the ring-shaped portion 65 is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pulling operation of the handle lever 62. Further, the ring-shaped portion 65 has a plurality of cells separated in the circumferential direction at regular intervals. Although these cells cannot accept operations by the player, they are effectively used in situations where the player is informed of the operation method.

When requesting some operation from the player, a reduced version image showing the operation method of the operation unit 60 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. At this time, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (operation effective time), the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is expressed as if each cell is a lamp. To. More specifically, the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is represented as if all the cells are lit when it becomes operable, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. It is expressed as if all cells were turned off when the remaining time was exhausted. The actual ring-shaped portion 65 does not have a light source and does not turn on / off like the ring-shaped portion 65 shown in the reduced version image displayed on the screen, but the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced version image. By switching the lighting / extinguishing of the unit 65 in this way, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation.

Further, the push button 64 is configured to have a structure that greatly protrudes upward when a predetermined trigger occurs in the progress of the game. When the push button 64 protrudes, it pops out to a height about three times higher than in the normal state. The push button 64 has a light source inside thereof. The push button 64 normally emits light in one color (for example, blue) or multiple colors, but when protruding, it emits more colorfully and can exert a great presence. By such an operation of the push button 64, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pressing operation of the button required in this scene is particularly important.

In the present embodiment, the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 are mounted on the same operation unit 60, but the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 may be provided as independent operation members. Further, these operating members may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.

In addition, a direction key 66 is installed on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6 adjacent to the lending operation unit 14. The direction key 66 is a cross-shaped arrangement of four key switches indicating the up, down, left, and right directions, and the key switches for each direction can be independently pressed and operated. The player can arbitrarily move the cursor or the like displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display by pressing the direction key 66 in various scenes of the production.

[Decorative unit]
A decorative unit 800 is attached to the upper front part of the pachinko machine 1. The decorative unit 800 can be attached to and detached from the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined mounting member (mechanical mechanism such as a screw or a hook). The decorative unit 800 may be non-removable from the pachinko machine 1.
The decorative unit 800 (decorative object) is a box-shaped member, and is composed of a transparent or translucent member that transmits light. The decorative unit 800 is a cube-shaped member on which predetermined character information is displayed, and the LED (for example, the left top lens unit 47 or the glass frame top lamp 46) arranged in the rear integrated door unit 4 emits light. It emits light.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 82, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the power supply control unit 162, the main control board unit 170, the payout device unit 172, the flow path unit 173, the launch control board set 174, the payout control board unit 176, and the back cover Unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), external terminal boards 160, power cord (power plug) 164, which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, are used. A ground wire (earth terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed.

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main control device in a manner visible in the upper left region of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located at the lower right of the seven segments. Has been done. The performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a keyhole 306 for a setting key. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing RAM, that is, initializing a RAM (RWM) installed in the main controller, and in the present embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. Will be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing or referring to the setting related to the game of the pachinko machine 1.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in the transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. Further, the keyhole 306 for the setting key is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is still sealed.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 are merely examples, and can be arranged at any position. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without reference numeral), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. , A game ball replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game ball stored in the prize ball tank 172a is guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal board 160, the game progress state of the pachinko machine 1. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ..

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island facility of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 83 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 of another embodiment alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate, and the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit in a state where the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7. On the front surface of the game plate 8b, a game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (without reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape. The launch rail extends clockwise from the lower left corner position of the game board 8b to the upper right corner position of the game board 8b.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. The left side portion of the game area 8a is the first game area (left-handed area L) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time reduction state), and the right side portion of the game area 8a is the special game state (big hit game). It is a second gaming area (right-handed area R, specific area) used in a state, a small hit game state, a low probability time shortening state, a high probability time shortening state, etc.). The left side portion of the gaming area 8a is also used in the high probability non-time shortening state (advantageous gaming state). Further, in the game area 8a, a middle start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device are placed around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. The starting gate 20, the variable starting winning device 28, the second variable winning device 31, and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side portion of the game area 8a. Here, the first variable winning device 30 is arranged on the right side of the middle start winning opening 26, and the second variable winning device 31 is arranged on the upper right of the first variable winning device 30. Further, the three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged on the left side portion of the game area 8a, and the one ordinary winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right side is arranged on the lower left of the first variable winning device 30. There is.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, passes through the starting gate 20, and is a variable start winning device at the time of operation. 28, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right region of the game area 8a mainly passes through the start gate 20, enters the variable start winning device 28 during operation, or enters the first variable winning device 30 during open operation. There is a possibility of entering the ball, entering the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation, or entering the normal winning opening 24. The game ball that has passed through the start gate 20 continuously flows down in the game area 8a, but the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning opening The game ball that has entered the device 31 is collected on the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when the game ball is to be inserted into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, the area on the left side in the game area 8a (left-handed). It is necessary to hit a game ball into the area) (perform a so-called "left-handed").

On the other hand, when a game ball is to be entered into the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal winning opening 24, the area on the right side in the game area 8a (right-handed area). ), It is necessary to hit the game ball (perform a so-called "right hit").

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a hit manner), and the right start is performed accordingly. It is possible to enter a ball into the winning opening 28a (predetermined entry opening) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 is provided with a tongue piece type (veloc type) opening / closing member 28b. In the state shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 28b is in a position (retracted position) recessed from the board surface, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the right starting winning opening 28a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 28b moves to a position (driving position) protruding toward the front side from the board surface, the opening / closing member 28b catches the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a (right). It is possible or easy to enter the starting winning opening 28a). The variable start winning device 28 may be a device in which the opening / closing member is displaced so as to fall forward with the lower end edge portion as a hinge to open the right starting winning opening.

The first variable winning device 30 is a predetermined first condition (for example, from the first round of the big hit game) when the specified condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of big hit or small hit). It operates when the conditions of the 5th round, or the 7th to 10th rounds, and the condition that the small hit game is open) are satisfied, and it is possible to enter the first big winning opening 30b. (Special electric accessory, first special ball entry event generation means).

The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged below the variable starting winning device 28 (upper attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position to the open position by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to win the first prize opening 30b (the first prize opening 30b is closed). be. When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall to the right with the lower end edge portion thereof as a hinge, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the inflow of game balls is not impossible, and the event of winning a prize in the first large winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30b. The game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30b passes through the first count switch 84, and after the winning is detected, it is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the collection passage (without reference numeral).

The second variable winning device 31 is said to be a predetermined second condition (for example, the sixth round of the big hit game) when the specified condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode). It operates when the condition) is satisfied, and enables the ball to enter the second large winning opening 31b (specific winning opening) (special electric accessory, second special winning event generating means).

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged below the first variable winning device 30 (lower attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a, so that the opening / closing member 31a is moved to the second large winning opening 31b. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not impossible (possible or easy), and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guidance passage 31c for guiding the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is arranged. The guide passage 31c extends to the lower left from the second large winning opening 31b, and branches into two at the end.

A second count switch 85 is arranged upstream of the guide passage 31c, and a blade member 31d for the probability change region and a hole 31e for the probability change region are arranged on the lower right side of the guide passage 31c. A discharge port 31f (discharge region) is arranged on the lower left side of the 31c.

It is detected that the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is first entered by the second count switch 85. Here, when the probabilistic region solenoid that operates the probabilistic region blade member 31d is ON, the probabilistic region blade member 31d moves to a position (open position) retracted deeper than the board surface, and the game ball. Is led to the hole 31e for the probabilistic region. On the other hand, when the probabilistic region solenoid that operates the probabilistic region blade member 31d is turned off, the probabilistic region blade member 31d moves to a position (closed position) protruding toward the front side from the board surface, so that the game is played. The sphere passes through the upper part of the blade member 31d for the probability variation region and is guided to the discharge port 31f.

[Probability change area (specific area)]
Further, a probability variation region (without reference numeral) is provided inside the probability variation region hole 31e. The probabilistic region is a region in which the game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the vane member 31d for the probabilistic region operates when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. If so, it is an area where the game ball can pass.

The probabilistic region blade member 31d may operate during the jackpot game. The operation pattern of the blade member 31d for the probabilistic region is such that the probabilistic region is opened for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round, and then closed for several seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds), and then the probabilistic region is opened for a long period of time. One of a long opening pattern that opens for a long time (for example, about 20 seconds) and a short opening pattern that opens a short opening for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round is applied. .. Which operation pattern is used to operate the probabilistic region blade member 31d can be selected by the winning symbol. Specifically, a long open pattern that opens the probabilistic region for a long time is selected when the probabilistic symbol is won, and a short open pattern that opens the probabilistic region for a short time is selected when the normal symbol is won.

As the operation pattern of the probabilistic region blade member 31d, only the pattern in which the probabilistic region blade member 31d is long-opened is applied, and when the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened and the round ends, the probabilistic region The opportunity for the blade member 31d to open for a long time may be eliminated. Further, since the game ball does not reach the probability change region blade member 31d in the short-term opening executed at the same time as the start of the round, it is difficult to guide the game ball to the probability change region by this operation.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the low probability state is changed to the high probability state after the big hit game is completed. At this time, the transition from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state may be performed (high probability time reduction state). On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the state shifts to the low probability state after the end of the big hit game. At this time, the transition from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state may be performed (low probability time reduction state).

The effect unit 40 is installed in the game board unit 8 from the center position to the right side portion. The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to a special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. .. As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including movable bodies and light emitting bodies) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b are included. ) Can be added. A ring-shaped logo LED unit 900 is arranged in front of the liquid crystal display 42.

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the inside of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f for effect (for example, a decoration imitating the shape of a spade). The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By the effect using these movable bodies 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge portion of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge portion thereof. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. .. A blade member that is constantly movable by a solenoid (not shown) is placed at the entrance of the ball guide passage 40d, and a distribution device that is constantly movable by a solenoid (not shown) is placed at the exit of the ball guide passage 40d (a game ball at the middle start winning opening 26). A device for sorting whether or not to induce a solenoid) may be arranged.

In addition, an out opening 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, the game balls that have entered the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are also driven into the game area 8a. All the game balls are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the supply route of the island facility (not shown).

[Visibility of the upper end of the outer rail]
FIG. 84 is a schematic view showing a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 81. FIG. 84 shows a cross section cut along a plane parallel to the vertical direction and the front-rear direction passing through the upper end (top, upper end of the outer peripheral surface 502 (outer rail)) of the game area 8a. The cross section shown in FIG. 84 also passes through the upper end (top) of the inner peripheral surface 504 (inner rail) and the upper end (top) of the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 (design member).

The rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 is located below the upper end of the game area 8a in the portion corresponding to the upper end of the game area 8a (the front part of the upper end of the game area 8a). That is, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 is located below the upper end of the upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500. Further, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 is located above the upper end of the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500. Further, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 is located above the lower end of the game ball X (the game ball in contact with the upper end of the upper surface 840a of the guidance passage 500) located at the upper end of the game area 8a. is doing. More specifically, it is located above the center of the game ball X in this state (the position shown by the alternate long and short dash line Y in FIG. 84).

Further, the protruding portion 856 projects downward from the center of the game ball X in a state of being located at the upper end of the game area 8a. That is, the lower end of the protrusion 856 is located below the center of the game ball X in that state. More specifically, the lower end of the protruding portion 856 is located below the lower end of the game ball X in the state. Further, the protruding portion 856 projects downward from the upper end of the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500.

As is clear from the above, the decorative unit 800 overlaps with the game ball X located at the upper end of the game area 8a in the front-rear direction (direction perpendicular to the game board unit 8 and the glass unit G). , It is designed to cover the entire game ball X in the state. Further, in the decorative unit 800, the portion corresponding to the upper end of the game area 8a at the rear end of the lower surface 852 (the front part of the upper end of the game area 8a) is in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the game board unit 8 and the glass unit G). The game ball X is not overlapped with at least the lower half of the game ball X located at the upper end of the game area 8a, and does not cover at least the lower half of the game ball in the state. Further, the rear portion of the lower surface 852 is an inclined surface 854. Therefore, even when the game ball is located at the upper end of the game area 8a, the player can easily see the game ball rolling in the game area 8a. Here, it is preferable that at least the lower half of the game ball in the state can be seen from a predetermined position, specifically, the player's eye point, without the player moving his / her face up / down / left / right. The player's eye point means the position of the player's eyes when sitting on a chair and playing a game. Specifically, for example, when the distance between the glass unit G and the player's eyes in the front-rear direction is less than 50 to 90 cm, at least a part of the game ball in the state without the player moving his / her face up / down / left / right. It is good to be able to see (lower half). That is, the decorative unit 800 is on a straight line from a predetermined point where the distance from the glass unit G is less than 50 to 90 cm to the game ball X (the portion below the center of the game ball X) located at the upper end of the game area 8a. It is good that it does not take.

The following features can be derived from the configuration of FIG. 84. It can be a gaming machine having at least one of the following configurations shown in parentheses.
(1) A front frame (integrated door unit 4) having a design part (top lens part, decorative unit 800) and an inner frame (inner frame assembly 7) having a game board (game board unit 8) are provided at the upper part. It is a gaming machine.
(2) A game area 8a is formed on the game board.
(3) At the upper part of the game area 8a, there is a guide passage 500 that guides the game ball to the right-handed area.
(4) The guide passage 500 has an outer peripheral surface (outer peripheral surface 502, upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500) and an inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral surface 504, lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500).
(5) Of the lines extending in the direction perpendicular to the game board surface, the line passing through the top of the outer peripheral surface is defined as the first reference line L1.
(6) Of the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1 (among the parts where the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1 can intersect the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1), the design The rearmost portion on the lower surface of the portion is referred to as the first design portion D1.
(7) Of the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1 (among the parts where the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1 can intersect the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1), the design The lowermost portion on the lower surface of the portion is referred to as a second design portion D2.
(8) The first design portion D1 is located below the first reference line L1 and the distance (dimension A) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball (4 mm). The diameter of the game ball is about 11 mm.
(9) The second design portion D2 is located below the first reference line L1 and the distance (dimension B) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball (40 mm).
Since the second design portion D2 is located below the first reference line L1 and the distance (dimension B) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, the design portion can be enlarged. can.
Further, when the game ball is strongly launched (game ball passage) by making the distance between the first reference line L1 and the first design part D1 smaller than the diameter of the game ball while increasing the size of the design part in this way. When the game ball rolls along the upper surface of the above), the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

(10) Of the lines extending in the direction perpendicular to the game board surface, the part located directly below the top of the outer peripheral surface on the inner peripheral surface (the part on the right side of the point B, the part on the left side of the point B, and the part that becomes the point B). ) Is the second reference line L2.
(11) Of the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 (among the portions where the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 can intersect with the second reference line L2), the design The rearmost portion on the lower surface of the portion is referred to as the first design portion D1.
(12) Of the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 (among the parts where the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 can intersect, the part where the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 intersect with the design portion), the design. The lowermost portion on the lower surface of the portion is referred to as a second design portion D2.
(13) The first design portion D1 is located above the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension C) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball (14 mm).
(14) The second design portion D2 is located below the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension D) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball (22 mm).
Since the second design portion D2 is located below the second reference line L2 and the distance (dimension D) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, the design portion can be enlarged. can. Further, when the game ball is launched weakly by making the distance between the second reference line L2 and the first design part D1 equal to or larger than the radius of the game ball while increasing the size of the design part in this way (game ball passage). When the game ball rolls along the lower surface of the game ball), the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.
By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of the game board surface can be ensured by the structure.

[Arrangement of positioning holes on the outer rail]
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an outer rail. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a game board, an outer rail, and a rail base. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing how the game ball comes into contact with the outer rail. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an outer rail and a game board.
As shown in FIG. 85, the outer rail 600 is a bendable thin plate-shaped horizontally long member. The outer rail 600 is formed with a plurality of predetermined guide portions 601 (holes) for guiding the mounting position to the game board (rail base 700). Further, the outer rail 600 is formed with a plurality of holes 602 used for processing the outer rail 600. The hole 602 is smaller in size than the guide portion 601.

The distance Wc from the center of the predetermined guide portion 601 (hole) to the end (lower end in the figure) of the outer rail 600 is set to 2.7 mm. That is, the predetermined guide portion 601 is arranged at a position where the game ball rolling on the inner guide surface of the outer rail 600 does not hit. More specifically, all the predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged at positions where the game ball rolling on the inner guide surface of the outer rail 600 does not hit.

As shown in FIG. 86, a rail base 700 is arranged in front of the game plate 8b, and a curved outer rail 600 is arranged on the curved guide surface 702 inside the rail base 700. A plurality of protrusions 701 are formed on the guide surface 702 at positions corresponding to the predetermined guide portions 601.

As shown in FIG. 87, the outer rail 600 is arranged on the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700. A protrusion 701 of the rail base 700 is inserted into a predetermined guide portion 601 of the outer rail 600, whereby the outer rail 600 is positioned on the rail base 700. Here, the protrusion 701 is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the game ball X.

As shown in FIG. 88, the outer rail 600 is arranged in front of the game board 8b, passes from the start end (PS) of the outer rail 600 on the lower left, passes through the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 on the left side, and is on the upper side. It is curved so as to pass through the upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 and reach the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 on the upper right.

The following features can be derived from the configurations shown in these figures. It can be a gaming machine having at least one of the following configurations shown in parentheses.
(1) A gaming machine including a gaming board (game board unit 8, game board 8b, rail base 700) forming a game area, and an outer rail 600 provided on the game board.
(2) The outer rail 600 has a predetermined guide portion 601 for guiding the mounting position to the game board (holes (many) for inserting the protrusions 701, holes for mounting the positioning pins, and cutouts for fitting the protrusions 701). Are formed in plurality. Further, the outer rail 600 is formed with a hole 602 used when processing the outer rail 600.
(3) In a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is set as the first range (H1), and the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is set. The range from the upper end (PU) to the upper end (PU) is defined as the second range (H2), and the range from the upper end (PU) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as the third range (H3).
(4) The number of predetermined guide portions 601 is larger in the first range (H1) (for example, 3) than in the second range (H2) (for example, 2), and is in the second range (H2). There are more than the third range (H3) (for example, 0).

As a result, a large number of predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged on the ball launcher side where the impact received from the game ball is large and the arrangement of the outer rail 600 is particularly required to be accurate, and the outer rail 600 on the ball launcher side is displaced. And vibration can be reliably prevented.
Further, the terminal side of the outer rail 600, which receives a small impact from the game ball and has little influence on the game, has a small number of predetermined guide portions 601 so that the outer rail 600 can be easily processed and attached to the rail base 700. can do.

(5) Instead of the above (4), the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is equal to or larger than the second range (H2) in the first range (H1) and the third in the second range (H2). There is more than the range (H3) of.
(6) Instead of the above (4), the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is equal to or larger than the third range (H3) in the first range (H1) and the third in the second range (H2). There is more than the range (H3) of.
(7) Instead of the above (4), the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is equal to or larger than the second range (H2) in the first range (H1) and the third in the first range (H1). There is more than the range (H3) of.
(8) The predetermined guide portion 601 is not formed at the upper apex (PU) and the left apex (PL) of the outer rail 600.

(9) The predetermined guide portion 601 is not formed in the third range (H3).
(10) The predetermined guide portion 601 is formed at a position where the game balls do not come into contact with each other (for example, a position avoiding a trajectory with which the game balls come into contact).
(11) The outer rail 600 is supported along the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700, and the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700 is inclined so that the game ball does not easily flow in the forward direction.
(12) The predetermined guide portions 601 are not evenly arranged at each other.

(13) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is the fourth range (H4). ), And the range from the left end (PL) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is the fifth range (H5), and the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is the fourth range (H4) (for example, 3). The number of pieces) is larger than that of the fifth range (H5) (for example, two pieces).
(14) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 is the sixth range (H6). ), And the range from the upper end (PU) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is the seventh range (H7), and the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is the sixth range (H6) (for example, five). ) Is more than the seventh range (H7) (for example, 0).
(15) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the middle (PM) of the outer rail 600 is the eighth range (H8). ), And the range from the middle (PM) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is the ninth range (H9), and the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is the eighth range (H8) (for example, 4). The number of pieces) is larger than that of the ninth range (H9) (for example, one piece).
Then, by adopting such a configuration, the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized and the game can be performed according to the design value.

The invention may be a combination of the invention having the configuration described in [Visibility of the upper end portion of the outer rail] and the invention having the configuration described in [Arrangement of positioning holes of the outer rail], and has been described in the above embodiment. The invention may be a combination of an invention having a configuration, an invention having the configuration described in [Visibility of the upper end portion of the outer rail], and an invention having the configuration described in [Arrangement of positioning holes of the outer rail]. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of stabilizing the trajectory of the gaming ball and playing the game as designed. Further, by stabilizing the trajectory of the game ball, it is possible to reliably secure the visibility of the game ball from the lower surface side of the decorative unit.

1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a 2nd special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game status display device 42 Liquid crystal display 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU
2007 7-segment display device 300 Storage display device

Claims (3)

When the first lottery opportunity occurs, the first lottery execution means for executing the first lottery and
When the first lottery is executed, the first symbol display means for displaying the first symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the first symbol in an manner according to the result of the first lottery.
A means of making it difficult for a second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity to occur more than the first lottery opportunity in a predetermined gaming state.
When the second lottery opportunity occurs, the second lottery execution means for executing the second lottery and the second lottery execution means
When the second lottery is executed, the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then the second symbol is stopped and displayed in an manner according to the result of the second lottery, and the second symbol display means.
It is provided with a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on the second lottery opportunity in the predetermined game state.
The specific effect is
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, even if the second lottery opportunity occurs in the predetermined gaming state, it is not executed and is not executed.
The game board that forms the game area,
Equipped with an outer rail provided on the game board,
The outer rail is formed with a plurality of predetermined guide portions for guiding the mounting position to the game board.
In a state where the outer rail is provided on the game board, the range from the start end to the left end of the outer rail is defined as the first range, and the range from the left end to the upper end of the outer rail is defined as the second range. If the range from the top to the end of the rail is the third range,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of the predetermined guide portions is larger in the first range than in the second range and in the second range than in the third range. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The predetermined condition is
A gaming machine characterized in that a special fluctuation pattern different from a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the second symbol. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
A gaming machine comprising a variation pattern selection means capable of selecting a variation pattern having a variation time in which the specific effect cannot be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

Images